2014 KX 85 KX 100 Service Manual

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 332
At a glance
Powered by AI
The key takeaways are that this manual provides service and repair information for KX85, KX85-II and KX100 motorcycle models. It covers topics such as general information, maintenance, fuel, cooling, engine, chassis, electrical systems, and includes a troubleshooting guide.

The purpose of this manual is to provide service and repair instructions for KX85, KX85-II and KX100 motorcycle models.

The systems covered in this manual include general information, periodic maintenance, fuel, cooling, engine (top end, right side, removal/installation, bottom end/transmission), wheels/tires, final drive, brakes, suspension, steering, frame and electrical systems.

KX85

KX85-II
KX100

Motorcycle
Service Manual
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Quick Reference Guide

General Information 1 j
Periodic Maintenance 2 j
Fuel System 3 j
Cooling System 4 j
Engine Top End 5 j
Engine Right Side 6 j
Engine Removal/Installation 7 j
Engine Bottom End/Transmission 8 j
Wheels/Tires 9 j
Final Drive 10 j
Brakes 11 j
Suspension 12 j
Steering 13 j
Frame 14 j
Electrical System 15 j
Appendix 16 j

This quick reference guide will assist


you in locating a desired topic or pro-
cedure.
Bend the pages back to match the
black tab of the desired chapter num-
ber with the black tab on the edge at
each table of contents page.
Refer to the sectional table of contents
for the exact pages to locate the spe-
cific topic required.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
KX85
KX85-II
KX100

Motorcycle
Service Manual
All rights reserved. No parts of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or
transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic mechanical photocopying, recording or otherwise,
without the prior written permission of Quality Assurance Division/Motorcycle & Engine Company/Kawasaki
Heavy Industries, Ltd., Japan.
No liability can be accepted for any inaccuracies or omissions in this publication, although every possible
care has been taken to make it as complete and accurate as possible.
The right is reserved to make changes at any time without prior notice and without incurring an obligation
to make such changes to products manufactured previously. See your Motorcycle dealer for the latest
information on product improvements incorporated after this publication.
All information contained in this publication is based on the latest product information available at the time
of publication. Illustrations and photographs in this publication are intended for reference use only and may
not depict actual model component parts.

2013 Kawasaki Heavy Industries, Ltd. 1st Edition (0) : May 17, 2013

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS
A ampere(s) KIPS Kawasaki Integrated Powervalve System
ABDC after bottom dead center km/h kilometers per hour
AC alternating current L liter(s)
Ah ampere hour lb pound(s)
ATDC after top dead center m meter(s)
BBDC before bottom dead center min minute(s)
BDC bottom dead center mph miles per hour
BTDC before top dead center N newton(s)
C degree(s) Celsius oz ounce(s)
CDI Capacitor Discharge Ignition Pa pascal(s)
cmHg centimeters of mercury PS horsepower
cu in. cubic inch(s) psi pound(s) per square inch
DC direct current qt quart(s)
F farad(s) r revolution
F degree(s) Fahrenheit rpm revolution(s) perminute
ft foot, feet s second(s)
g gram(s) TDC top dead center
gal gallon(s) TIR total indicator reading
h hour(s) V volt(s)
HP horsepower(s) W watt(s)
in. inch(s) ohm(s)

COUNTRY AND AREA CODES


AU Australia EUR Europe
CA Canada US United States

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Foreword
This manual is designed primarily for use by For example, if you want ignition coil informa-
trained mechanics in a properly equipped shop. tion, use the Quick Reference Guide to locate
However, it contains enough detail and basic in- the Electrical System chapter. Then, use the
formation to make it useful to the owner who de- Table of Contents on the first page of the chap-
sires to perform his own basic maintenance and ter to find the Ignition Coil section.
repair work. A basic knowledge of mechanics, Whenever you see symbols, heed their in-
the proper use of tools, and workshop proce- structions! Always follow safe operating and
dures must be understood in order to carry out maintenance practices.
maintenance and repair satisfactorily. When-
ever the owner has insufficient experience or DANGER
doubts his ability to do the work, all adjust- DANGER indicates a hazardous situa-
ments, maintenance, and repair should be car- tion which, if not avoided, will result in
ried out only by qualified mechanics. death or serious injury.
In order to perform the work efficiently and
to avoid costly mistakes, read the text, thor- WARNING
oughly familiarize yourself with the procedures WARNING indicates a hazardous situa-
before starting work, and then do the work care- tion which, if not avoided, could result
fully in a clean area. Whenever special tools or in death or serious injury.
equipment are specified, do not use makeshift
tools or equipment. Precision measurements NOTICE
can only be made if the proper instruments are
used, and the use of substitute tools may ad- NOTICE is used to address practices not
versely affect safe operation. related to personal injury.
To get the longest life out of your vehicle: This manual contains four more symbols
Follow the Periodic Maintenance Chart in the
Service Manual.
which will help you distinguish different types
of information.
Be alert for problems and non-scheduled
maintenance. NOTE
Use proper tools and genuine Kawasaki Mo-
torcycle parts. Special tools, gauges, and
NOTE indicates information that may help
or guide you in the operation or service of
testers that are necessary when servicing the vehicle.
Kawasaki motorcycles are introduced by the
Service Manual. Genuine parts provided as Indicates
done.
a procedural step or work to be
spare parts are listed in the Parts Catalog.
Follow the procedures in this manual care- Indicates a procedural sub-step or how to do
fully. Dont take shortcuts. the work of the procedural step it follows. It
Remember to keep complete records of main-
tenance and repair with dates and any new
also precedes the text of a NOTE.
Indicates a conditional step or what action to
parts installed. take based on the results of the test or inspec-
tion in the procedural step or sub-step it fol-
lows.
How to Use This Manual In most chapters an exploded view illustration
In this manual, the product is divided into of the system components follows the Table of
its major systems and these systems make up Contents. In these illustrations you will find the
the manuals chapters. The Quick Reference instructions indicating which parts require spec-
Guide shows you all of the products system ified tightening torque, oil, grease or a locking
and assists in locating their chapters. Each agent during assembly.
chapter in turn has its own comprehensive Ta-
ble of Contents.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
GENERAL INFORMATION 1-1

General Information
Table of Contents
1
Before Servicing ..................................................................................................................... 1-2
Model Identification................................................................................................................. 1-7
General Specifications............................................................................................................ 1-10
Unit Conversion Table ............................................................................................................ 1-16

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1-2 GENERAL INFORMATION
Before Servicing
Before starting to perform an inspection service or carry out a disassembly and reassembly opera-
tion on a motorcycle, read the precautions given below. To facilitate actual operations, notes, illustra-
tions, photographs, cautions, and detailed descriptions have been included in each chapter wherever
necessary. This section explains the items that require particular attention during the removal and
reinstallation or disassembly and reassembly of general parts.
Especially note the following:
Edges of Parts
Lift large or heavy parts wearing gloves to prevent injury
from possible sharp edges on the parts.

Solvent
Use a high flash-point solvent when cleaning parts. High
flash-point solvent should be used according to directions
of the solvent manufacturer.

Cleaning Vehicle before Disassembly


Clean the vehicle thoroughly before disassembly. Dirt or
other foreign materials entering into sealed areas during ve-
hicle disassembly can cause excessive wear and decrease
performance of the vehicle.

Arrangement and Cleaning of Removed Parts


Disassembled parts are easy to confuse. Arrange the
parts according to the order the parts were disassembled
and clean the parts in order prior to assembly.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


GENERAL INFORMATION 1-3
Before Servicing
Storage of Removed Parts
After all the parts including subassembly parts have been
cleaned, store the parts in a clean area. Put a clean cloth
or plastic sheet over the parts to protect from any foreign
materials that may collect before re-assembly.

Inspection
Reuse of worn or damaged parts may lead to serious ac-
cident. Visually inspect removed parts for corrosion, discol-
oration, or other damage. Refer to the appropriate sections
of this manual for service limits on individual parts. Replace
the parts if any damage has been found or if the part is be-
yond its service limit.

Replacement Parts
Replacement parts must be KAWASAKI genuine or
recommended by KAWASAKI. Gaskets, O-rings, oil seals,
grease seals, circlips, cotter pins or self-locking nuts must
be replaced with new ones whenever disassembled.

Assembly Order
In most cases assembly order is the reverse of disassem-
bly, however, if assembly order is provided in this Service
Manual, follow the procedures given.

Tightening Sequence
Generally, when installing a part with several bolts, nuts,
or screws, start them all in their holes and tighten them to
a snug fit. Then tighten them according to the specified se-
quence to prevent case warpage or deformation which can
lead to malfunction. Conversely when loosening the bolts,
nuts, or screws, first loosen all of them by about a quar-
ter turn and then remove them. If the specified tightening
sequence is not indicated, tighten the fasteners alternating
diagonally.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1-4 GENERAL INFORMATION
Before Servicing
Tightening Torque
Incorrect torque applied to a bolt, nut, or screw may
lead to serious damage. Tighten fasteners to the specified
torque using a good quality torque wrench. Often, the
tightening sequence is followed twice-initial tightening and
final tightening with torque wrench.
All of the tightening torque values are for use with dry,
solvent - cleaned threads unless otherwise indicated. If a
fastener which should have dry, clean threads gets contami-
nated with lubricant, etc., applying even the specified torque
could damage it.
Force
Use common sense during disassembly and assembly,
excessive force can cause expensive or hard to repair dam-
age. When necessary, remove screws that have a non
-permanent locking agent applied using an impact driver.
Use a plastic-faced mallet whenever tapping is necessary.

Gasket, O-ring
Hardening, shrinkage, or damage of both gaskets
and O-rings after disassembly can reduce sealing per-
formance. Remove old gaskets and clean the sealing
surfaces thoroughly so that no gasket material or other
material remains. Install new gaskets and replace used
O-rings when re-assembling.

Liquid Gasket, Non-permanent Locking Agent


For applications that require Liquid Gasket or a
Non-permanent Locking Agent, clean the surfaces so
that no oil residue remains before applying liquid gasket or
non-permanent locking agent. Do not apply them exces-
sively. Excessive application can clog oil passages and
cause serious damage.

Press
For items such as bearings or oil seals that must be
pressed into place, apply small amount of oil to the con-
tact area. Be sure to maintain proper alignment and use
smooth movements when installing.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


GENERAL INFORMATION 1-5
Before Servicing
Ball Bearing and Needle Bearing
Do not remove pressed ball or needle unless removal is
absolutely necessary. Replace with new ones whenever
removed. Press bearings with the manufacturer and size
marks facing out. Press the bearing into place by putting
pressure on the correct bearing race as shown.
Pressing the incorrect race can cause pressure between
the inner and outer race and result in bearing damage.

Oil Seal, Grease Seal


Do not remove pressed oil or grease seals unless removal
is necessary. Replace with new ones whenever removed.
Press new oil seals with manufacture and size marks facing
out. Make sure the seal is aligned properly when installing.

Apply specified grease to the lip of seal before installing


the seal.

Circlips, Cotter Pins


Replace circlips or cotter pins that were removed with new
ones. Take care not to open the clip excessively when in-
stalling to prevent deformation.

Lubrication
It is important to lubricate rotating or sliding parts during
assembly to minimize wear during initial operation. Lubri-
cation points are called out throughout this manual, apply
the specific oil or grease as specified.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1-6 GENERAL INFORMATION
Before Servicing
Direction of Engine Rotation
When rotating the crankshaft by hand, the free play
amount of rotating direction will affect the adjustment. Ro-
tate the crankshaft to positive direction (clockwise viewed
from output side).

Electrical Leads
A two-color lead is identified first by the primary color and
then the stripe color. Unless instructed otherwise, electrical
leads must be connected to those of the same color.

Instrument
Use a meter that has enough accuracy for an accurate
measurement. Read the manufactures instructions thor-
oughly before using the meter. Incorrect values may lead
to improper adjustments.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


GENERAL INFORMATION 1-7
Model Identification
KX85CE Left Side View

KX85CE Right Side View

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1-8 GENERAL INFORMATION
Model Identification
KX85DE Left Side View

KX85DE Right Side View

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


GENERAL INFORMATION 1-9
Model Identification
KX100FE Left Side View

KX100FE Right Side View

Frame Number Engine Number

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1-10 GENERAL INFORMATION
General Specifications

Items KX85CE KX85DE


Dimensions
Overall Length 1 830 mm (72.04 in.) 1 920 mm (75.59 in.)
Overall Width 765 mm (30.1 in.)
Overall Height 1 100 mm (43.31 in.) 1 150 mm (45.28 in.)
Wheelbase 1 265 mm (49.80 in.) 1 310 mm (51.57 in.)
Road Clearance 290 mm (11.4 in.) 330 mm (13.0 in.)
Seat Height 830 mm (32.7 in.) 870 mm (34.3 in.)
Curb Mass: 75 kg (165 lb) 77 kg (169 lb)
Front 36 kg (79 lb) 37 kg (82 lb)
Rear 39 kg (86 lb) 40 kg (88 lb)
Fuel Tank Capacity 5 L (1 US qt)
Engine
Type 2-stroke, single cylinder, piston reed
valve
Cooling System Liquid-cooled
Bore and Stroke 48.5 45.8 mm (1.91 1.80 in.)
Displacement 84 cm (5.1 Cu in.)
Compression Ratio 10.9 (Low speed)
9.0 (High speed)
Fuel System Carburetor, KEIHIN PWK28
Fuel Type:
Minimum Octane Rating:
Research Octane
(AU, EUR) 95
Number (RON)
Antiknock Index (RON
(US, CA) 90
+ MON)/2
Starting System Primary kick
Ignition System CDI (Digital)
Timing Advance Electronically advanced
Ignition Timing 12 BTDC at 11 320 r/min (rpm)
Spark Plug NGK R6252K-105
Terminal Solid-post
Port Timing
Intake:
Open Full open
Close
Scavenging:
Open 63.8 BBDC
Close 63.8 ABDC
Duration 127.6
Exhaust:
Open 79 (Low speed)
93.6 (High speed)
Close 79 (Low speed)
93.6 (High speed)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


GENERAL INFORMATION 1-11
General Specifications

Items KX85CE KX85DE


Duration 158 (Low speed)
187.2 (High speed)
Lubrication System Petrol mix (32 : 1)
Drive Train
Primary Reduction System:
Type Gear
Reduction Ratio 3.400 (68/20)
Clutch Type Wet, multi disc
Transmission:
Type 6-speed, constant mesh, return shift
Gear Tatios:
1st 2.538 (33/13)
2nd 1.875 (30/16)
3rd 1.500 (27/18)
4th 1.250 (25/20)
5th 1.090 (24/22)
6th 0.956 (22/23)
Final Drive System:
Type Chain drive
Reduction Ratio 3.571 (50/14) 3.923 (51/13)
Overall Drive Ratio 11.607 at Top gear 12.758 at Top gear
Transmission Oil:
Type API SG, SH, SJ, SL or SM with JASO
MA, MA1 or MA2
Viscosity SAE 10W-40
Capacity 0.7 L (0.7 US qt)
Frame
Type Tubular, semi-double cradle
Steering Angle 45 to either side
Caster (Rake Angle) 29
Trail 97 mm (3.8 in.) 108 mm (4.25 in.)
Front Wheel:
Tire Size 70/100-17 40M 70/100-19 42M
Tire Make/Type DUNLOP MX51F, Tube type
Rim Size 17 1.40 19 1.40
Rear Wheel:
Tire Size 90/100-14 49M 90/100-16 52M
Tire Make/Type DUNLOP MX51, Tube type
Rim Size 14 1.60 16 1.85
Front Suspension:
Type Telescopic fork (upside down)
Wheel Travel 275 mm (10.8 in.)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1-12 GENERAL INFORMATION
General Specifications

Items KX85CE KX85DE


Rear Suspension:
Type Swing arm (Uni-trak)
Wheel Travel 275 mm (10.8 in.)
Brake Type:
Front and Rear Single disc
Effective Disc Diameter:
Front 202 mm (7.95 in.)
Rear 150 mm (5.91 in.)
Specifications are subject to change without notice, and may not apply to every country.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


GENERAL INFORMATION 1-13
General Specifications

Items KX100FE
Dimmensions
Overall Length 1 920 mm (75.59 in.)
Overall Width 765 mm (30.1 in.)
Overall Height 1 150 mm (45.28 in.)
Wheelbase 1 310 mm (51.57 in.)
Road Clearance 330 mm (13.0 in.)
Seat Height 870 mm (34.3 in.)
Curb Mass: 77 kg (169 lb)
Front 37 kg (82 lb)
Rear 40 kg (88 lb)
Fuel Tank Capaciry 5 L (1 US qt)
Engine
Type 2-stroke, single cylinder, piston reed valve
Cooling System Liquid-cooled
Bore and Stroke 52.5 45.8 mm (2.07 1.80 in.)
Displacement 99 cm (6.0 Cu in.)
Compression Ratio 10.2 (Low speed)
8.7 (High speed)
Fuel System Carburetor, KEIHIN PWK28
Fuel Type:
Minimum Octane Rating:
Antiknock Index (RON + MON)/2 90
Starting System Primary kick
Ignition System CDI (Digital)
Timing Advance Electronically advanced
Ignition Timing 12 BTDC at 12 640 r/min (rpm)
Spark Plug NGK R6252K-105
Terminal Splid-post
Port Timing
Intake:
Open Full open
Close
Scavenging:
Open 62.8 BBDC
Close 62.8 ABDC
Duration 125.6
Exhaust:
Open 81.7 (Low speed),
93.6 (High speed)
Close 81.7 (Low speed),
93.6 (High speed)
Duration 163.4 (Low speed),
187.2 (High speed)
Lubrication System Petrol mix (32:1)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1-14 GENERAL INFORMATION
General Specifications

Items KX100FE
Drive Train
Primary Reduction System:
Type Gear
Reduction Ratio 3.400 (68/20)
Clutch Type Wet, multi disc
Transmission:
Type 6-speed, constant mesh, return shift
Gear Tatios
1st 2.538 (33/13)
2nd 1.875 (30/16)
3rd 1.500 (27/18)
4th 1.250 (25/20)
5th 1.090 (24/22)
6th 0.956 (22/23)
Final Drive System:
Type Chain drive
Reduction Ratio 3.923 (51/13)
Overall Drive Ratio 12.758 at Top gear
Transmission Oil:
Type API SG, SH, SJ, SL or SM with JASO MA, MA1 or MA2
Viscosity SAE 10W-40
Capacity 0.7 L (0.7 US qt)
Frame
Type Tubular, semi double cradle
Steering Angle 45 to either side
Caster (Rake Angle) 29
Trail 108 mm (4.25 in.)
Front Wheel:
Tire Size 70/100-19 42M
Tire Make/Type DUNLOP MX51F, Tube type
Rim Size 19 1.40
Rear Wheel:
Tire Size 90/100-16 52M
Tire Make/Type DUNLOP MX51, Tube type
Rim Size 16 1.85
Front Suspension:
Type Telescopic fork (upside down)
Wheel Travel 275 mm (10.8 in.)
Rear Suspension:
Type Swingarm (Uni-trak)
Wheel Travel 275 mm (10.8 in.)
Brake Type:
Front and Rear Single disc

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


GENERAL INFORMATION 1-15
General Specifications

Items KX100FE
Effective Disc Diameter:
Front 202 mm (7.95 in.)
Rear 150 mm (5.97 in.)
Specifications are subject to change without notice, and may not apply to every country.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1-16 GENERAL INFORMATION
Unit Conversion Table
Prefixes for Units: Units of Length:
km 0.6214 = mile
Prefix Symbol Power
m 3.281 = ft
mega M 1 000 000
mm 0.03937 = in.
kilo k 1 000
centi c 0.01
milli m 0.001 Units of Torque:
micro 0.000001 Nm 0.1020 = kgfm
Nm 0.7376 = ftlb
Nm 8.851 = inlb
Units of Mass: kgfm 9.807 = Nm
kg 2.205 = lb kgfm 7.233 = ftlb
g 0.03527 = oz kgfm 86.80 = inlb

Units of Volume: Units of Pressure:


L 0.2642 = gal (US) kPa 0.01020 = kgf/cm
L 0.2200 = gal (IMP) kPa 0.1450 = psi
L 1.057 = qt (US) kPa 0.7501 = cmHg
L 0.8799 = qt (IMP) kgf/cm 98.07 = kPa
L 2.113 = pint (US) kgf/cm 14.22 = psi
L 1.816 = pint (IMP) cmHg 1.333 = kPa
mL 0.03381 = oz (US)
mL 0.02816 = oz (IMP) Units of Speed:
mL 0.06102 = cu in. km/h 0.6214 = mph

Units of Force: Units of Power:


N 0.1020 = kg kW 1.360 = PS
N 0.2248 = lb kW 1.341 = HP
kg 9.807 = N PS 0.7355 = kW
kg 2.205 = lb PS 0.9863 = HP

Units of Temperature:

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


PERIODIC MAINTENANCE 2-1

Periodic Maintenance
Table of Contents
Periodic Maintenance Chart ................................................................................................... 2-3
Torque and Locking Agent...................................................................................................... 2-5 2
Specifications ......................................................................................................................... 2-8
Special Tools .......................................................................................................................... 2-10
Periodic Maintenance Procedures.......................................................................................... 2-11
Fuel System......................................................................................................................... 2-11
Fuel Hose and Connection Inspection .............................................................................. 2-11
Throttle Grip (Throttle Cable) Free Play Inspection .......................................................... 2-11
Throttle Grip (Throttle Cable) Free Play Adjustment......................................................... 2-11
Idle Speed (Carburetor) Adjustment ................................................................................ 2-12
Air Cleaner Element Cleaning and Inspection .................................................................. 2-13
Fuel System Clean............................................................................................................ 2-15
Reed Valve Inspection ...................................................................................................... 2-16
Cooling System.................................................................................................................... 2-16
Coolant Level Inspection................................................................................................... 2-16
Coolant Deterioration Inspection....................................................................................... 2-17
Water Hoses and Connections Inspection ........................................................................ 2-18
Engine Top End ................................................................................................................... 2-18
Cylinder Head Warp Inspection ........................................................................................ 2-18
Cylinder Wear Inspection.................................................................................................. 2-19
Piston/Cylinder Clearance Inspection ............................................................................... 2-20
Piston, Piston Ring and Piston Pin Replacement ............................................................. 2-20
Exhaust Valve Cleaning and Inspection............................................................................ 2-20
Exhaust System Inspection............................................................................................... 2-20
Expansion Chamber O-rings Replacement ...................................................................... 2-21
Silencer Wool Replacement.............................................................................................. 2-21
Engine Right Side ................................................................................................................ 2-22
Clutch Operation Inspection.............................................................................................. 2-22
Clutch Plates Inspection ................................................................................................... 2-23
Engine Lubrication System .................................................................................................. 2-23
Transmission Oil Change.................................................................................................. 2-24
Breather Hoses Inspection................................................................................................ 2-25
Crankshaft/Transmission ..................................................................................................... 2-25
Crankshaft Inspection ....................................................................................................... 2-25
Wheels/Tires ........................................................................................................................ 2-26
Air Pressure Inspection/Adjustment.................................................................................. 2-26
Tires Inspection................................................................................................................. 2-26
Spoke Tightness Inspection.............................................................................................. 2-27
Rim Runout Inspection...................................................................................................... 2-27
Wheel Bearing Inspection ................................................................................................. 2-28
Final Drive............................................................................................................................ 2-28
Drive Chain Wear Inspection ............................................................................................ 2-28
Drive Chain Slack Inspection ............................................................................................ 2-29
Drive Chain Slack Adjustment .......................................................................................... 2-29
Drive Chain Lubrication..................................................................................................... 2-30
Sprocket Wear Inspection................................................................................................. 2-30
Rear Sprocket Warp (Runout) Inspection ......................................................................... 2-31
Drive Chain Guide, Guide Roller, Chain Slipper Wear Inspection .................................... 2-31
Brakes.................................................................................................................................. 2-32
Brake Lever and Pedal Adjustment .................................................................................. 2-32

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


2-2 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE

Brake Fluid Level Inspection............................................................................................. 2-32


Brake Fluid Change .......................................................................................................... 2-35
Brake Pad Wear Inspection .............................................................................................. 2-38
Brake Master Cylinder Rubber Parts Replacement .......................................................... 2-38
Caliper Rubber Parts Replacement .................................................................................. 2-40
Brake Hoses and Connections Inspection ........................................................................ 2-44
Brake Hose Replacement ................................................................................................. 2-44
Suspension .......................................................................................................................... 2-45
Front Fork Inspection ........................................................................................................ 2-45
Front Fork Oil Change ...................................................................................................... 2-45
Rear Shock Absorber Oil Change..................................................................................... 2-48
Swingarm and Uni-Trak Linkage Inspection ..................................................................... 2-52
Swingarm and Uni-Trak Linkage Pivot Lubrication ........................................................... 2-53
Steering ............................................................................................................................... 2-53
Steering Inspection ........................................................................................................... 2-53
Steering Adjustment ......................................................................................................... 2-53
Steering Stem Bearing Lubrication ................................................................................... 2-54
Frame .................................................................................................................................. 2-54
Frame Inspection .............................................................................................................. 2-54
Electrical System ................................................................................................................. 2-55
Spark Plug Cleaning and Inspection................................................................................. 2-55
Spark Plug Replacement .................................................................................................. 2-55
General Lubrication and Cable Inspection........................................................................... 2-55
Lubrication ........................................................................................................................ 2-55
Cable Inspection ............................................................................................................... 2-56
Nut, Bolt, and Fastener Tightness Inspection...................................................................... 2-56
Tightness Inspection ......................................................................................................... 2-56

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


PERIODIC MAINTENANCE 2-3
Periodic Maintenance Chart
The maintenance must be done in accordance with this chart to keep the motorcycle in good running
condition.
FREQUENCY Every 5
Each Every 3 Every 10
races As re- See
race races races
OPERATION (12.5 quired Page
(2.5 hr) (7.5 hr) (25 hr)
hr)
ENGINE
Clutch - adjust 2-22
Clutch and friction plates - inspect R 2-23
Throttle cable - adjust 2-11
Spark plug - clean/regap R 2-55
Air cleaner element - clean 2-13
Air cleaner element - replace When damaged 2-13
Carburetor - inspect/adjust 2-12
Transmission oil - change 2-24
Piston and piston ring - clean/ inspect R 2-20
2-18,
Cylinder head and cylinder - inspect 2-19
Exhaust valves - clean/inspect 2-20
Silencer - clean/inspect 2-20
Silencer wool - change 2-21
Connecting rod small end bearing -
inspect R 2-20

Kick pedal and shift pedal - clean


Expansion chamber O-rings - replace 2-21
Engine sprocket - inspect 2-30
Coolant - inspect R 2-16
Radiator hoses, connections - inspect
2-18

Reed valve - inspect 2-16


CHASSIS
Brake adjustment - inspect 2-32
Brake pad wear - inspect 2-38
Brake fluid level - inspect 2-32
Brake fluid - change Every 2 years 2-35
Brake master cylinder cups and dust
Every 2 years 2-38
seals - replace
Brake caliper piston seals and dust
Every 2 years 2-40
seals - replace
Brake hoses, connections - inspect 2-44
Brake hose - replace Every 4 years 2-44
Spoke tightness and rim runout -
inspect 2-27

Drive chain - adjust 2-29


Drive chain - lubricate 2-30

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


2-4 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
Periodic Maintenance Chart

FREQUENCY Every 5
Each Every 3 Every 10
races As re- See
race races races
OPERATION (12.5 quired Page
(2.5 hr) (7.5 hr) (25 hr)
hr)
Drive chain wear - inspect 2-28
Chain slipper and guide - replace When damaged 2-31
Front fork - inspect/clean 2-45
Front fork oil - change 1st time after 2 races, then every 5 races 2-45
Nuts, bolts, fasteners - inspect 2-56
Fuel system - clean 2-15
Fuel hoses, connections - inspect 2-11
Fuel hose - replace Every 5 years 2-11
Steering play - inspect 2-53
Steering stem bearing - grease 2-54
2-30,
Rear sprocket - inspect 2-31
General lubrication - perform 2-55
Wheel bearing - inspect 2-28
Swingarm and Uni-Trak linkage pivots
- grease 2-53

Swingarm and Uni-Trak linkage pivots


- inspect 2-52

Rear shock oil - replace 1st time after 2 races, then every 5 races 2-48
: Replace, add, adjust, clean or torque if necessary.
R: Replace

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


PERIODIC MAINTENANCE 2-5
Torque and Locking Agent
Tighten all bolts and nuts to the proper torque using an accurate torque wrench. If insufficiently
tightened, a bolt or nut may become damaged, strip an internal thread, or break and then fall out. The
following table lists the tightening torque for the major bolts and nuts, and the parts requiring use of
a non-permanent locking agent or silicone grease etc. All of the values are for use with dry solvent -
cleaned threads unless otherwise indicated.
When checking the tightening torque of the bolts and nuts, first loosen the bolt or nut by half a turn
and then tighten to specified torque.
Letters used in the Remarks column mean:
AL: Tighten the two clamp bolts alternately two times to ensure even tightening torque.
G: Apply grease.
L: Apply a non-permanent locking agent.
Lh: Left-hand Threads
R: Replacement Parts
S: Follow the specified tightening sequence.
Si: Apply silicone grease (ex. PBC grease).
2T: Apply 2-stroke oil.

Torque
Fastener Remarks
Nm kgfm ftlb
Fuel System
Reed Valve Screws 1.0 0.10 8.9 inlb
Carburetor Holder Mounting Bolts 9.4 1.0 83 inlb
Carburetor Mounting Clamp Screw 1.5 0.15 13 inlb
Fuel Tank Screws 12 1.2 106 inlb
Cooling System
Water Hose Clamp Screws 3.0 0.31 27 inlb
Coolant Drain Bolt (Cylinder) 8.8 0.90 78 inlb
Air Bleeder Bolt 9.4 1.0 83 inlb
Water Pump Cover Bolts 9.4 1.0 83 inlb
Water Pump Impeller Bolt 8.3 0.85 73 inlb
Coolant Drain Bolt (Water Pump) 5.2 0.53 46 inlb
Engine Top End
Cylinder Head Nuts 25 2.5 18 S
Exhaust Valve Cover Screws 3.0 0.31 27 inlb
KIPS Cover Bolts 5.2 0.53 46 inlb
Exhaust Valve Lever Mounting Bolt 3.9 0.40 35 inlb L
Exhaust Valve Plate Bolts 5.9 0.60 52 inlb
Cylinder Nuts 25 2.5 18 S
Muffler Body Cover Bolts 8.8 0.90 78 inlb L
Engine Right Side
Clutch Cover Bolts 9.4 1.0 83 inlb
Clutch Spring Bolts 9.3 0.95 82 inlb
Clutch Hub Nut 88 9.0 65 R
Lever Shaft Assembly Mounting Screw 6.4 0.65 57 inlb L
Kick Pedal Bolt 9.4 1.0 83 inlb
Lever Shaft Retaining Bolt 5.2 0.53 46 inlb
Hand
Oil Filler Cap
-tighten
Right Engine Cover Bolts 9.4 1.0 83 inlb

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


2-6 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
Torque and Locking Agent

Torque
Fastener Remarks
Nm kgfm ftlb
Kick Ratchet Guide Bolt 9.4 1.0 83 inlb
Kick Ratchet Guide Screw 5.2 0.53 46 inlb
Primary Gear Nut 49 5.0 36 Lh
Engine Removal/Installation
Engine Bracket Mounting Nuts 29 3.0 21 R
Engine Mounting Nuts 29 3.0 21 R
Swingarm Pivot Shaft Nut 69 7.0 51 R
Engine Bottom End/Transmission
Drive Shaft Bearing Retainer Bolts 9.4 1.0 83 inlb
Shift Drum Bearing Retainer Bolts 9.4 1.0 83 inlb
Transmission Oil Drain Bolt 20 2.0 15
Crankshaft Cover Bolts 9.8 1.0 87 inlb L
Crankcase Bolts 9.4 1.0 83 inlb S
Output Shaft Bearing Retainer Screws 5.2 0.53 46 inlb L
Shift Drum Cam Bolt 23 2.3 17
Gear Positioning Lever Bolt 9.4 1.0 78 inlb
Shift Shaft Return Spring Pin 22 2.2 16 L
Shift Pedal Bolt 9.8 1.0 87 inlb
Wheels/Tires
Spoke Nipples 4.0 0.41 35 inlb
Front Axle Nut 78 8.0 58 R
Rear Axle Nut 78 8.0 58 R
Final Drive
Rear Sprocket Nuts 34 3.5 25 R, S
Brakes
Brake Hose Banjo Bolts 25 2.5 18
Front Brake Reservoir Cap Screws 1.5 0.15 13 inlb
Front Master Cylinder Clamp Bolts 8.8 0.90 78 inlb S
Brake Lever Pivot Bolt 5.9 0.60 52 inlb Si
Brake Lever Pivot Bolt Locknut 5.9 0.60 52 inlb
Front Brake Disc Mounting Bolts 9.8 1.0 87 inlb L
Bleed Valve 7.8 0.80 69 inlb
Front Caliper Mounting Bolts 25 2.5 18
Brake Hose Banjo Bolts 25 2.5 18
Rear Master Cylinder Mounting Bolts 9.8 1.0 87 inlb
Rear Master Cylinder Push Rod Locknut 17.5 1.78 12.9
Brake Pedal Bolt 25 2.5 18 G
Rear Caliper Mounting Bolts 25 2.5 18
Rear Caliper Holder Bolt 22.1 2.25 16.3 L
Rear Brake Pad Pins 17.2 1.75 12.7
Bleed Valve 7.8 0.80 69 inlb
Rear Brake Disc Mounting Bolts 9.8 1.0 87 inlb L

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


PERIODIC MAINTENANCE 2-7
Torque and Locking Agent

Torque
Fastener Remarks
Nm kgfm ftlb
Suspension
Air Pressure Relief Screws 1.3 0.13 12 inlb
Front Fork Top Plugs 28 2.9 21
Front Fork Clamp Bolts (Upper) 20 2.0 15
Front Fork Clamp Bolts (Lower) 20 2.0 15 AL
Front Fork Push Rod Nuts 15 1.5 11
Compression Valve Assembly 55 5.6 41 L
Rocker Arm Bracket Bolts 83 8.5 61 G
Rocker Arm Pivot Nut 83 8.5 61 R
Tie-Rod Mounting Nuts 59 6.0 44 R
Compression Damping Adjuster 17.5 1.78 12.9
Rear Shock Absorber Mounting Bolt
39 4.0 29
(Upper)
Rear Shock Absorber Mounting Bolt
39 4.0 29
(Lower)
Swingarm Pivot Shaft Nut 69 7.0 51 R
Steering
Handlebar Holder Bolts 25 2.5 18 2T, S
Front Fork Clamp Bolts (Upper) 20 2.0 15
Steering Stem Head Nut 64 6.5 47
Handlebar Holder Nuts 34 3.5 25 R
Steering Stem Nut 4.9 0.50 43 inlb
Front Fork Clamp Bolts (Lower) 20 2.0 15 AL
Frame
Rear Frame Pipe Nuts 34 3.5 25 R
Electrical System
Spark Plug 25.5 2.60 18.8 inlb
Stator Coil Plate Mounting Screws 5.2 0.53 46 inlb
Flywheel Nut 29 3.0 21

Basic Torque for General Fasteners


Threads Diameter Torque
(mm) Nm kgfm ftlb
5 3.4 4.9 0.35 0.50 30 43 inlb
6 5.9 7.8 0.60 0.80 52 69 inlb
8 14 19 1.4 1.9 10 13.5
10 25 34 2.6 3.5 19 25
12 44 61 4.5 6.2 33 45
14 73 98 7.4 10.0 54 72
16 115 155 11.5 16.0 83 115
18 165 225 17.0 23.0 125 165
20 225 325 23.0 33.0 165 240

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


2-8 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
Specifications

Item Standard Service Limit


Fuel System
Throttle Grip Free Play 2 3 mm (0.08 0.12 in.)
Air Cleaner Element Polyurethane foam
Air Cleaner Element Oil High-quality foam air filter oil
Red Warp 0.2 mm (0.008 in.)
Cooling System
Coolant:
Type (Recommended) Permanent type antifreeze
Color Green
Mixed Ratio Soft water 50%, coolant 50%
Freezing Point 35C (31F)
Total Amount 0.57 L (0.60 US qt)
Engine Top End
Cylinder Head Warp 0.03 mm
(0.001 in.)
Cylinder Inside Diameter (see text):
KX85C/D 48.505 48.520 mm 48.60 mm
(1.9096 1.9102 in.) (1.913 in.)
KX100F 52.515 52.530 mm 52.62 mm
(2.0675 2.0681 in.) (2.072 in.)
Piston/Cylinder Clearance:
KX85C/D 0.056 0.066 mm

(0.0022 0.0026 in.)
KX100F 0.075 0.085 mm

(0.0030 0.0033 in.)
Clutch
Clutch Lever Free Play 8 13 mm (0.3 0.5 in.)
Friction Plate Thickness 2.92 3.08 mm (0.115 0.121 in.) 2.8 mm (0.11 in.)
Friction Plate Warp 0.15 mm (0.0059 in.) or less 0.3 mm (0.01 in.)
Steel Plate Warp 0.15 mm (0.0059 in.) or less 0.3 mm (0.01 in.)
Engine Bottom End/Transmission
Transmission Oil:
Type API SG, SH, SJ, SL or SM with JASO
MA, MA1 or MA2
Viscosity SAE 10W-40
Amount 0.7 L (0.7 US qt)
Connecting Rod Big End Side 0.40 0.50 mm 0.7 mm
Clearance (0.016 0.020 in.) (0.03 in.)
Wheels/Tires
Rim Runout (with tire installed):
Axial TIR 1.0 mm (0.04 in.) or less TIR 2.0 mm
(0.08 in.)
Radial TIR 1.0 mm (0.04 in.) or less TIR 2.0 mm
(0.08 in.)
Tires Air Pressure (Front/Rear) 100 125 kPa (1.02 1.27 kgf/cm,

14.5 18.1 psi)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


PERIODIC MAINTENANCE 2-9
Specifications

Item Standard Service Limit


Standard Tire:
Front:
Size:
KX85C 70/100-17 40M
KX85D/KX100F 70/100-19 42M
Make DUNLOP
Type MX51F
Rear:
Size:
KX85C 90/100-14 49M
KX85D/KX100F 90/100-16 52M
Make DUNLOP
Type MX51
Final Drive
Drive Chain Slack 54 64 mm (2.1 2.5 in.)
Drive Chain 20-link Length 254.0 254.6 mm (10.00 10.02 in.) 259 mm (10.2 in.)
Rear Sprocket Warp (Runout) TIR 0.4 mm (0.016 in.) or less TIR 0.5 mm
(0.020 in.)
Brakes
Brake Lever Free Play Adjustable (to suit rider)
Brake Fluid Type:
Front DOT3 or DOT4
Rear DOT4
Brake Pad Lining Thickness:
Front 4.0 mm (0.16 in.) 1 mm (0.04 in.)
Rear 4.0 mm (0.16 in.) 1 mm (0.04 in.)
Suspension
Front Fork
Suspension Oil:
Type Kawasaki KHL 15-10 or equivalent
Amount 310 4 mL (10.5 0.1 US oz.) (Adjustable Range)
295 325 mL
(9.97 11.0 US oz.)
Rear Shock Absorber
Suspension Oil:
Type Kawasaki KHV10-K2C or equivalent
Amount 162 mL (5.48 US oz.)
Electrical System
Spark Plug:
Type NGK R6252K-105
Gap 0.7 0.8 mm (0.028 0.031 in.)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


2-10 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
Special Tools
Inside Circlip Pliers: Fork Oil Level Gauge:
57001-143 57001-1290

Steering Stem Nut Wrench: Fork Piston Rod Puller, M10 1.0:
57001-1100 57001-1298

Jack: Jack Attachment:


57001-1238 57001-1608

Fork Spring Holder:


57001-1286

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


PERIODIC MAINTENANCE 2-11
Periodic Maintenance Procedures
Fuel System
Fuel Hose and Connection Inspection
If the motorcycle is not properly handled, the inside the
fuel line can cause fuel to leak [A].
Check the fuel hose.
Replace the fuel hose if any fraying, cracks [B], bulges [C]
or ozone cracks [D] are noticed.

Check that the fuel hose [A] is securely connected and


clamps [B] are tightened correctly.
Route the hose according to Cable, Wire, and Hose Rout-
ing section in the Appendix chapter.
Avoid sharp bending, kinking, flattening or twisting, and
route the fuel hose with a minimum of bending so that the
fuel flow will not be obstructed.
Replace the fuel hose if it has been sharply bent or kinked.

Throttle Grip (Throttle Cable) Free Play Inspection


Check throttle grip free play by lightly turning the throttle
grip [A] back and forth [B].
Throttle Grip Free Play
Standard: 2 3 mm (0.08 0.12 in.)
If the free play is improper, adjust the throttle cable.
Check that the throttle grip moves smoothly from full open
to close, and the throttle closes quickly and completely in
all steering positions by the return spring.
If the throttle grip does not return properly, check the throt-
tle cable routing, grip free play, and cable damage. Then
lubricate the throttle cable.
Run the engine at the idle speed, and turn the handlebar
all the way to the right and left to ensure that the idle speed
does not change.
If the idle speed increase, check the throttle cable free
play and the cable routing.
Throttle Grip (Throttle Cable) Free Play
Adjustment
Pull the rubber boot [A] of the upper end of the throttle
cable [B].
Loosen
cable.
the locknuts [C] at the upper end of the throttle

Turn the throttle cable adjuster [D] until 2 3 mm (0.08


0.12 in.) of throttle grip play is obtained.
Tighten the locknut and install the rubber boot.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


2-12 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
Periodic Maintenance Procedures
If the throttle cable free play cannot be adjusted with the
upper end of the throttle cable, use the cable adjuster [A]
at the carburetor.
Pull the rubber boot [B] of the carburetor.
Loosen the locknuts [C] at the carburetor.
Turn the throttle cable adjuster until 2 3 mm (0.08 0.12
in.) of throttle grip play is obtained.
Tighten the locknut and install the rubber boot.

If the throttle grip free play cannot be adjusted with the


adjuster, replace the throttle cable.
Turn the handlebars from side to side while idling the en-
gine. If idle speed varies, the throttle cable may be poorly
routed or it may be damaged.
WARNING
Operation with improperly adjusted, incorrectly
routed or damaged cable could result in an unsafe
riding condition. Follow the service manual to
make sure to correct any of these conditions.

Idle Speed (Carburetor) Adjustment


Start the engine and warm it up thoroughly.
Back it out
Turn in the air screw [A] until it seats lightly.
the specified number of turns.
Air Screw
Standard:
KX85C/D 1 1/2 turns out
KX100F 1 7/8 turns out

NOTICE
Do not force the air screw beyond the fully seated
position, or the adjusting mechanism may be dam-
aged.

Turn the idle adjusting screw [B] until the idle speed is
correct.
Open and close the throttle a few times to make sure that
the idle speed is within the specified range. Readjust if
necessary.
With the engine idling, turn the handlebars to both sides.
If handlebars movement changes the idle speed, the
throttle cable may be improperly adjusted or incorrectly
routed, or it may be damaged. Be sure to correct any
of these conditions before riding (see Cable, Wire, and
Hose Routing section in the Appendix chapter).
WARNING
Operation with improperly adjusted, incorrectly
routed or damaged cable could result in an unsafe
riding condition. Follow the service manual to
make sure to correct any of these conditions.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


PERIODIC MAINTENANCE 2-13
Periodic Maintenance Procedures
Air Cleaner Element Cleaning and Inspection
NOTE
In dusty areas, the element should be cleaned more
frequently than recommended interval.
After riding through rain or on muddy roads, the element
should be cleaned immediately.
Since repeated cleaning opens the pores of the ele-
ment, replace it with a new one in accordance with the
Periodic Maintenance Chart. Also, if there is a break in
the element material or any other damage to the ele-
ment, replace the element with a new one.

WARNING
Gasoline and low flash-point solvents can be
flammable and/or explosive and cause severe
burns. Clean the element in a well-ventilated area,
and take care that there is no spark or flame any-
where near the working areas. Do not use gasoline
or low flash-point solvents to clean the element.

Remove:
Seat (see Seat Removal in the Frame chapter)
Wing Bolt [A]
Air Cleaner Element [B]
Stuff a clean, lint-free towel into the air cleaner duct so no
dirt is allowed to enter the carburetor.
Wipe out the inside of the air cleaner housing with a clean
damp towel.
NOTICE
Check inside of the inlet tract and carburetor for
dirt. If dirt is present, clean the inlet tract and car-
buretor thoroughly. You may also need to replace
the element and seal the housing and inlet tract.

Separate the element [A] from the frame [B].

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


2-14 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
Periodic Maintenance Procedures

Clean the element [A] in a bath of a high flash-point sol-


vent using a soft bristle brush.

Squeeze it dry in a clean towel [A]. Do not wring the ele-


ment [B] or blow it dry; the element can be damaged.
Check all parts of the element for visible damage.
If any parts of the element are damaged, replace them.

After cleaning, saturate the element with a high-quality


foam-air-filter oil, squeeze out the excess, then wrap it in
a clean towel and squeeze it as dry as possible.
Be careful not to tear the sponge filter.
Assemble the element.
Remove the towel from the air cleaner duct.

Apply grease [A] to all connections and screw holes in the


air cleaner housing and inlet tract.
Install the element onto its frame, and coat the element
lip and lip seat with a thick layer of all-purpose grease to
assure a complete seal.

Fit the projection [A] of the air cleaner element [B] with the
groove of the air cleaner housing.
Tighten the wing bolt [C].

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


PERIODIC MAINTENANCE 2-15
Periodic Maintenance Procedures
Fuel System Clean
WARNING
Gasoline is extremely flammable and can be ex-
plosive under certain conditions. Always stop the
engine and do not smoke. Make sure the area is
well ventilated and free from any source of flame
or sparks; this includes any appliance with a pilot
light.

Turn the fuel tap to the OFF position.


Place a suitable container beneath the carburetor drain
plug [A].
Remove the drain plug from the bottom of the float bowl
and check for water or dirt in the fuel.
If any water or dirt comes out, clean the carburetor, fuel
tap and fuel tank.
Replace the drain plug O-ring with a new one.
Tighten the drain plug securely.
WARNING
Gasoline and low flash-point solvents can be
flammable and/or explosive and cause severe
burns. Clean the tank in a well-ventilated area, and
take care that there are no sparks or flame any-
where near the working area. Do not use gasoline
or low flash-point solvents to clean the tank.

Remove the fuel tank and drain the fuel (see Fuel Tank
Removal in the Fuel System chapter).
Pour some high flash-point solvent into the fuel tank and
shake the tank to remove dirt and fuel deposits.
Drain the solvent out of the tank.
System chapter).
Remove the fuel tap (see Fuel Tap Removal in the Fuel

Clean the fuel tap screen in a high flash-point solvent.


positions. flash-point solvent through the tap in all lever
Pour high

Dry the tank and tap with compressed air.


Fuel Tap (see Fuel Tap Installation in the Fuel System
Install:

chapter)
Fuel Tank (see Fuel Tank Installation in the Fuel System
chapter)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


2-16 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
Periodic Maintenance Procedures
Reed Valve Inspection
Remove the reed valve (see Reed Valve Removal in the
Fuel System chapter).
Inspect
age.
the reeds for cracks, folds, or other visible dam-

If there is any doubt as to the condition of a reed, replace


the reed valve part with a new one.
If a reed becomes wavy, replace the valve part with a new
one even if its warp is less than the service limit.
Measure the clearance between the reed [A] and holder
[B], and check the reed warp as shown.
If any one of the clearance measurements exceeds the
service limit, replace the valve part with a new one.
Reed Warp
Service Limit: 0.2 mm (0.008 in.)

Torque - Reed Valve screws: 1.0 Nm (0.10 kgfm, 8.9 inlb)


Install the reed valve (see Reed Valve Installation in the
Fuel System chapter).

Cooling System
WARNING
Coolant can be extremely hot and cause severe
burns, is toxic and very slippery. Do not remove
the radiator cap or attempt to change the coolant
when the engine is hot; allow it cool completely.
Immediately wipe any spilled coolant from tires,
frame, engine or other painted parts. Do not ingest
coolant.

Coolant Level Inspection


NOTE
Check the level when the engine is cold (room or ambi-
ent temperature).

Lean the motorcycle slightly until the radiator cap is level


to the ground so that the radiator cap is located uppermost
in order to exhaust the air accumulated in the radiator.
Remove the radiator cap [A].
NOTE
Remove the radiator cap in two steps. First turn the
cap counterclockwise to the first stop and wait there for
a few seconds. Then push down and turn it further in
the same direction and remove the cap.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


PERIODIC MAINTENANCE 2-17
Periodic Maintenance Procedures

Check the coolant level. The coolant level [A] should be


at the bottom of the radiator filler neck [B].
If the coolant level is low, add coolant through the radiator
filler opening to the bottom of the radiator filler neck.

Recommended Coolant
Permanent type antifreeze (soft water and ethylene
glycol plus corrosion and rust inhibitor chemicals for
aluminum engines and radiators)
Water and Coolant Mixture Ratio
Soft Water: 50%
Antifreeze: 50%
Freezing Point: 35C (31F)
Total Amount: 0.57 L (0.60 US qt.)

NOTICE
For refilling, add the specified mixture of coolant
and soft water. Adding water alone dilutes the
coolant and degrades its anticorrosion properties.
The diluted coolant can attack the aluminum en-
gine parts. In an emergency, soft water alone can
be added. But the diluted coolant must be returned
to the correct mixture ratio within a few days.

Install the radiator cap.


NOTE
The radiator cap must be installed in two steps. First
turn the cap clockwise to the first stop. Then push down
on it and turn it the rest of the way.

Coolant Deterioration Inspection


Visually inspect the coolant.
If whitish cotton-like wafts are observed, aluminum parts
in the cooling system are corroded. If the coolant is
brown, iron or steel parts are rusting. In either case, flush
the cooling system.
If the coolant gives off an abnormal smell, check for a
cooling system leak. It may be caused by exhaust gas
leaking into the cooling system.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


2-18 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
Periodic Maintenance Procedures
Water Hoses and Connections Inspection
Remove the right radiator shroud (see Radiator Removal
in the Cooling System chapter).
The high pressure inside the water hoses [A] can cause
coolant to leak [B] or the hose to burst if the line is not
properly maintained. Visually inspect the hoses for signs
of deterioration. Squeeze the hoses. A hose should not
be hard and brittle, nor should it be soft or swollen.
Replace the hose if any fraying, cracks [C] or bulges [D]
are noticed.
Check that the hoses are securely connected and clamps
are tightened correctly.
Torque - Water Hose Clamp Screws: 3.0 Nm (0.31 kgfm,
27 inlb)

Engine Top End


Cylinder Head Warp Inspection
Remove:
Spark Plug (see Spark Plug Cleaning and Inspection)
Cylinder Head (see Cylinder Head Removal in the En-
gine Top End chapter)
Lay a straightedge [A] across the lower surface of the
head at several different points, and measure warp by
inserting a thickness gauge between the straightedge and
the head.
Cylinder Head Warp
Service Limit: 0.03 mm (0.001 in.)
If warp exceeds the service limit, repair the mating sur-
face. Replace the cylinder head if the mating surface is
badly damaged.

Scrape the carbon out of the combustion chamber with a


scraper [A] or a suitable tool.
Clean the cylinder head, using high flash-point solvent.
in the cylinder
Blow out any particles which may obstruct the oil passage
head using compressed air.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


PERIODIC MAINTENANCE 2-19
Periodic Maintenance Procedures
Cylinder Wear Inspection
NOTE
Measure the cylinder inside diameter when the cylinder
is cold (at room temperature).

Visually Inspect the inside of the cylinder for scratches


and abnormal wear.
If the cylinder is damaged or badly worn, replace it with a
new one.

Take a side-to-side and a front-to-back measurement


shown in the figure (total 4 measurements).
The cylinder wear is uneven in different places.
5 mm (0.20 in.) [A]
20 mm (0.79 in.) [B]

Cylinder Inside Diameter


Standard: KX85C/D 48.505 48.520 mm (1.9096
1.9102 in.), and less
than 0.01 mm (0.0004 in.)
difference between any two
measurements.
KX100F 52.515 52.530 mm (2.0675
2.0681 in.), and less
than 0.01 mm (0.0004 in.)
difference between any two
measurements.
Service KX85C/D 48.60 mm (1.913 in.), or more
Limit: than 0.05 mm (0.020 in.)
difference between any two
measurements.
KX100F 52.62 mm (2.072 in.), or more
than 0.05 mm (0.020 in.)
difference between any two
measurements.
If any of the cylinder inside diameter measurements ex-
ceeds the service limit, the cylinder must be replaced with
a new one.
Since the PLATING cylinder cannot be bored or honed.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


2-20 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
Periodic Maintenance Procedures
Piston/Cylinder Clearance Inspection
The piston-to-cylinder clearance is measured whenever a
piston or cylinder is replaced with a new one. The standard
piston-to-cylinder clearance must be adhered to whenever
the cylinder is replaced.
If only a piston is replaced, the clearance may exceed the
standard slightly. But it must be within the standard, in order
to avoid piston seizure.
The most accurate way to find the piston clearance is
by making separate piston and cylinder diameter measure-
ments and then computing the difference between the two
values. Measure the piston diameter as just described, and
measure the cylinder diameter at the very bottom of the
cylinder.
Piston/Cylinder Clearance
Standard:
KX85C/D 0.056 0.066 mm (0.0022 0.0026 in.)
KX100F 0.075 0.085 mm (0.0030 0.0033 in.)

Piston, Piston Ring and Piston Pin Replacement


Refer to the Cylinder and Piston section in the Engine Top
End chapter.
Exhaust Valve Cleaning and Inspection
Remove the exhaust valve (see Exhaust Valve Removal
in the Engine Top End chapter).
Scrape out any carbon and clean the exhaust valves with
a high flash-point solvent.
Check the exhaust valves for sings of damage.
If necessary, replace them with new ones.
Install the exhaust valve (see Exhaust Valve Installation
in the Engine Top End chapter).
Exhaust System Inspection
The exhaust system, in particular the muffler, is designed
to reduce exhaust noise and conduct the exhaust gases
away from the rider while minimizing power loss. If car-
bon has built up inside the muffler, exhaust efficiency is
reduced, causing engine performance to drop.
If the muffler body is badly damaged, dented, cracked or
rusted, replace it.
If the exhaust noise becomes too loud or engine perfor-
mance drops, replace the baffle.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


PERIODIC MAINTENANCE 2-21
Periodic Maintenance Procedures
Expansion Chamber O-rings Replacement
Remove the expansion chamber (see Expansion Cham-
ber Removal in the Engine Top End chapter).
Replace the exhaust gasket and exhaust O-rings [A].
O-rings.
Apply molybdenum disulfide grease around the exhaust

Install the expansion chamber (see Expansion Chamber


Installation in the Engine Top End chapter).

Silencer Wool Replacement


Remove the muffler (see Muffler Removal/Installation in
the Engine Top End chapter).
Remove
baffle.
the liquid gasket on the silencer, tail pipe and

Remove:
Muffler Body Cover Bolts [A]
Tail Pipe [B]

Remove the O-ring [A].

Remove:
Baffle [A]
Silencer Wool [B]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


2-22 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
Periodic Maintenance Procedures

Replace the silencer wool and O-ring with new ones.


Install:
Silencer Wool
O-ring
Using a high flash-point solvent, clean off any oil or dirt
that may be on the liquid gasket coating area. Dry them
with a clean cloth.
Apply liquid gasket to the joint part [A] of the silencer [B]
and tail pipe [C].
Install the baffle and tail pipe into the silencer.
Install the muffler (see Muffler Removal/Installation in the
Engine Top End chapter).
Apply a non-permanent locking agent to the muffler body
cover bolts, and tighten them.
Torque - Muffler Body Cover Bolt: 8.8 Nm (0.90 kgfm, 78
ftlb)

Using a high flash-point solvent, clean off any oil or dirt


that may be on the liquid gasket coating area. Dry them
with a clean cloth.
Apply liquid gasket [A] to the joint part of the silencer [B]
and baffle [C].

Engine Right Side


Clutch Operation Inspection
Clutch Lever (Clutch Cable) Free Play Inspection
Slide the dust cover [A] out of place.
Check that the clutch cable upper end is fully seated in
the adjusting nut [B].
Pull the clutch lever [C] lightly, and check the free play [D].
Clutch Lever Free Play
Standard: 8 13 mm (0.3 0.5 in.)
If the play is too wide, the clutch may not release fully. If
the play is too narrow, the clutch may not engage fully. In
either case, adjust it.
Clutch Lever (Clutch Cable) Free Play Adjustment
Slide the dust cover [A] out of place.
Loosen the locknut [B].
Turn the clutch cable adjuster [C] so that the clutch lever
will have 8 13 mm (0.3 0.5 in.) of play.
NOTICE
Be sure that the outer cable end at the clutch lever
is fully seated in the adjuster at the clutch lever, or
it could slip into the place later, creating enough
cable play to prevent clutch disengagement.
If the free play can not be adjusted with the clutch cable
adjuster, use the adjusting nut.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


PERIODIC MAINTENANCE 2-23
Periodic Maintenance Procedures

Loosen the locknut [A] at the clutch cable, and turn the
adjusting nut [B] so that clutch lever has 8 13 mm (0.3
0.5 in.) of play.
Tighten the locknut, and start the engine and check that
the clutch does not slip and that it release properly.

Clutch Plates Inspection


Remove the clutch plates (see Clutch Removal in the En-
gine Right Side chapter).
Visually inspect the friction and steel plates to see if they
show signs of seizure, uneven wear or any other damage.
If any plates show signs of damage, replace the friction
plates and steel plates as a set.

Measure the thickness [A] of the friction plate at several


points with vernier calipers.
Friction Plate Thickness
Standard: 2.92 3.08 mm (0.115 0.121 in.)
Service Limit: 2.8 mm (0.11 in.)
If they have worn past the service limit, replace them with
new ones.

Place each friction plate or steel plate [B] on a surface


plate [A].
Measure the gap between the surface plate and each fric-
tion plate or steel plate with a thickness gauge [C]. The
gap is the amount of friction or steel plate warp.
Friction and Steel Plates Warp
Standard:
Friction Plate 0.15 mm (0.0059 in.) or less
Steel Plate 0.15 mm (0.0059 in.) or less
Service Limit:
Friction Plate 0.3 mm (0.01 in.)
Steel Plate 0.3 mm (0.01 in.)
If any plate is warped over the service limit, replace it with
a new one.

Engine Lubrication System


WARNING
Vehicle operation with insufficient, deteriorated,
or contaminated engine oil will cause accelerated
wear and may result in engine seizure, accident,
and injury. Check the oil level before each use and
change the oil and filter according to the periodic
maintenance chart.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


2-24 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
Periodic Maintenance Procedures
Transmission Oil Change
Warm up the engine thoroughly so that the oil will pick up
any sediment and drain easily. Then stop the engine.
Place an oil pan beneath the engine.
Remove the oil filler cap [A].

Remove the transmission oil drain bolt [A] from the bottom
of the engine, and let the oil drain completely.
NOTE
Hold the motorcycle upright so that the oil may drain
completely.

Replace the drain bolt gasket with a new one.


Install the drain bolt with the gasket.
Torque - Transmission Oil Drain Bolt: 20 Nm (2.0 kgfm, 15
ftlb)

Pour the specified transmission oil.


Recommended Transmission Oil
Type: API SG, SH, SJ or SL with JASO MA, MA1
or MA2
Viscosity: SAE 10W-40
Amount: 0.7 L (0.7 US qt.)

Install the oil filler cap.


Torque - Oil Filler Cap: Hand-tighten

NOTE
Do not add any chemical additive to the oil. Oils fulfilling
the above requirements are fully formulated and provide
adequate lubrication for the engine and the clutch.
The oil viscosity may need to be changed to accommo-
date atmospheric conditions in your riding area.

Check the oil level (see Oil Level Inspection in the Engine
Bottom End/Transmission chapter).

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


PERIODIC MAINTENANCE 2-25
Periodic Maintenance Procedures
Breather Hoses Inspection
Be certain that the breather hoses [A] are routed without
being flattened or kinked and is connected correctly.
If it is not, correct it.
Inspect the breather hoses for damage or sings of deteri-
oration.
This hose should not be hard and brittle, nor should be
soft swollen.
Replace the hoses if any damage is noticed.

Crankshaft/Transmission
Crankshaft Inspection
Remove:
Cylinder Head (see Cylinder Head Removal in the En-
gine Top End chapter)
Cylinder (see Cylinder Removal in the Engine Top End
chapter)
Piston (see Piston Removal in the Engine Top End chap-
ter)
Make sure that the crankshaft rotate smoothly (in the neu-
tral position).
If the crankshaft will not turn smoothly, check the connect-
ing rod big end side clearance.
If the connecting rod big end side clearance is good,
check the bearings (see Bearing Wear Inspection in the
Crankshaft/Transmission chapter).
Connecting Rod Big End Side Clearance
Measure the connecting rod big end side clearance at
right side of big end using a thickness gauge [A].
Connecting Rod Big End Side Clearance
Standard: 0.40 0.50 mm (0.016 0.020 in.)
Service Limit: 0.7 mm (0.03 in.)
If the clearance exceeds the service limit, replace the
crankshaft assembly or reassemble the crankshaft.
Make sure that the crankshaft rotates smoothly after as-
sembling the engine.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


2-26 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
Periodic Maintenance Procedures
Wheels/Tires
Air Pressure Inspection/Adjustment
Using a tire pressure gauge [A], measure the air pressure
when the tires are cold.
Adjust the tire air pressure to suit track conditions and
rider preference, but do not stray too far from the recom-
mended pressure.
Track Condition Tire Pressure
When the track is wet, muddy, sandy
100 kPa (1.02 kgf/cm,
or slippery, reduce the tire pressure
14.5 psi)
to increase the tire tread surface on

the ground.
When the track is pebbly or hard,

increase the tire pressure to prevent
125 kPa (1.27 kgf/cm,
damage or punctures, through the
18.1 psi)
tires will skid more easily.

Tires Inspection
Remove any imbedded stones or other foreign particles
from the tread.
Repair or replace with a new one if necessary.
Visually inspect the tire for cracks and cuts.
Replace the tire, if any damage are noticed.
Swelling or high spots indicate internal damage, requiring
tire replacement.
WARNING
Some replacement tires may adversely affect han-
dling and cause an accident resulting in serious in-
jury or death. To ensure proper handling and sta-
bility, use only the recommended standard tires for
replacement, inflated to the standard pressure.

Standard Tires
Front:
Size 70/100-17 40M (KX85C)
70/100-19 42M (KX85D/KX100F)
Make DUNLOP
Type MX51F
Rear:
Size 90/100-14 49M (KX85C)
90/100-16 52M (KX85D/KX100F)
Make DUNLOP
Type MX51

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


PERIODIC MAINTENANCE 2-27
Periodic Maintenance Procedures
Spoke Tightness Inspection
Check that all the spokes are adjusted evenly.
If spoke tightness is uneven or loose, tighten the spoke
nipples [A] to the specified torque.
Torque - Spoke Nipples: 4.0 Nm (0.41 kgfm, 35 inlb)
Check the rim runout (see Rim Runout Inspection).
WARNING
A missing spoke places an additional load on
the other spokes, which will eventually cause
other spokes to break, creating the potential for
an accident resulting in serious injury or death.
Immediately replace any broken spoke(s).

Rim Runout Inspection


Raise the rear wheel off the ground using the jack and
attachment.
Special Tools - Jack: 57001-1238
Jack Attachment: 57001-1608
Inspect the rim for cracks, dents, bending, or warping.
If there is any damage to the rim, it must be replaced.

Set up a dial gauge on the side of the rim and rotate the
wheel to measure its axial runout [A].
The difference between the highest and lowest readings
is the amount of runout.
Set up the dial gauge on the inner circumference of the
rim and rotate the wheel to measure its radial runout [B].
The difference between the highest and lowest readings
is the amount of runout.
Rim Runout (with tire installed)
Standard:
Axial TIR 1.0 mm (0.04 in.) or less
Radial TIR 1.0 mm (0.04 in.) or less
Service Limit:
Axial TIR 2.0 mm (0.08 in.)
Radial TIR 2.0 mm (0.08 in.)
If rim runout exceeds the service limit, check the wheel
bearings first (see Wheel Bearing Inspection).
If the problem is not due to the bearings, loosen some
spokes and tighten others to change the position of cer-
tain portions of the rim.
If the rim is badly bent, however, it should be replaced.
NOTE
The welding spot of the rim may show excessive runout.
Disregard this when measuring rim runout.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


2-28 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
Periodic Maintenance Procedures
Wheel Bearing Inspection
Raise the front/rear wheel off the ground using the jack.
Special Tools - Jack: 57001-1238
Jack Attachment: 57001-1608
Rotate [A] the wheel lightly, and check for roughness,
binding or noise.
If any damage is found, replace the hub bearing.

Turn the handlebars until the handlebars does not move


to either side (front wheel).
The wheel edge is moved [A] to one direction gripping the
edge of the wheel by both hands and the play of the wheel
bearing is checked.
If the play is found, replace the bearing.

Final Drive
Drive Chain Wear Inspection
Rotate the rear wheel to inspect the drive chain for dam-
aged rollers, and loose pins and links.
If there is any irregularity, replace the drive chain.
Lubricate the drive chain if it appears dry.
Bushing [A]
Roller [B]
Pin [C]
Pin Link [D]
Roller Link [E]

Stretch the chain taut by hanging a 10 kg (22 lb) weight


[A] on the chain.
Measure the length of 20 links [B] on the straight part [C] of
the chain from the pin center of the 1st pin to the pin center
of the 21st pin. Since the chain may wear unevenly, take
measurements at several places.
Drive Chain 20-link Length
Standard: 254.0 254.6 mm (10.00 10.02 in.)
Service Limit: 259 mm (10.2 in.)
If any measurements exceed the service limit, replace the
chain. Also, replace the front and rear sprockets when the
drive chain is replaced.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


PERIODIC MAINTENANCE 2-29
Periodic Maintenance Procedures

WARNING
A chain that breaks or jumps off the sprockets
could snag on the engine sprocket or lock the
rear wheel, severely damaging the motorcycle and
causing it to go out of control. Inspect the chain for
damage and proper adjustment before each ride.
If chain wear exceeds the service limit, replace it
with the standard chain.

Standard Chain
Make: DAIDO
Type: DID 420DS2
Link: 120 links (KX85C)
124 links (KX85D/KX100F)

Drive Chain Slack Inspection


With the motorcycle on its side stand.
NOTE
Clean the drive chain if it is dirty, and lubricate it if it
appears dry (see Drive Chain Lubrication).

Rotate the rear wheel to find the position where the chain
is tightest (because it wears unevenly).
Push up the drive chain in the middle of the upper chain
run to measure the chain slack.
Measure the distance [A] between the bottom-line of the
chain and the swingarm (at the end of the chain slipper).
Drive Chain Slack
Standard: 54 64 mm (2.1 2.5 in.)
If the drive chain slack exceeds the standard, adjust it
(see Drive Chain Slack Adjustment).
Drive Chain Slack Adjustment
Loosen the left and right chain adjuster locknuts [A].
If the chain
Remove the cotter pin [B] and loosen the rear axle nut [C].
is too tight, back out the left and right chain
adjusting bolts [D] evenly, and push the wheel forward
until the chain is too loose.
If the chain is too loose, turn both chain adjusting bolts
evenly until the drive chain has the correct amount of
slack. To keep the chain and wheel properly aligned, the
notch on the left chain adjuster should align with the same
swingarm mark [E] as the right chain adjuster notch [F].
Drive Chain Slack
Standard: 54 64 mm (2.1 2.5 in.)

Check the wheel alignment (see Wheel Alignment Inspec-


tion in the Final Drive chapter).
WARNING
Misalignment of the wheel will result in abnormal
wear and may result in an unsafe riding condition.
Be sure the wheel is properly aligned.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


2-30 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
Periodic Maintenance Procedures

Tighten both chain adjuster locknuts securely.


Replace the rear axle nut with a new one.
Tighten:
Torque - Rear Axle Nut: 78 Nm (8.0 kgfm, 58 ftlb)
Rotate the wheel, measure the chain slack again at the
tightest position, and readjust it if necessary.

Install
ends.
a new cotter pin [A] through the axle, and bend its

WARNING
A loose axle nut can lead to an accident resulting in
serious injury or death. Tighten the axle nut to the
proper torque and install a new cotter pin.

Check the rear brake effectiveness.


NOTE
In wet and muddy conditions, mud sticks to the chain
and sprockets resulting in an overly tight chain, and the
chain may break. To prevent this, adjust the chain to 64
74 mm (2.5 2.9 in.) of slack whenever necessary.
Drive Chain Lubrication
The chain should be lubricated with a lubricant which will
both prevent the exterior from rusting and also absorb
shock and reduce friction in the interior of the chain.
If the chain is especially dirty, it should be washed in
diesel oil or kerosene, and afterward soaked in a heavy
oil. Shake the chain while it is in the oil so that oil will pen-
etrate into the inside of each roller.
An effective, good quality lubricant specially formulated
for chains is best for regular chain lubrication.

IfSAE90
a special lubricant is not available, a heavy oil such as
is preferred to a lighter oil because it will stay on
the chain longer and provide better lubrication.
Apply oil to the sides of the rollers so that oil will penetrate
into the rollers and bushings.
Wipe off any excess oil.
Oil Applied Area [A]

Sprocket Wear Inspection


Visually inspect the front and rear sprocket teeth for wear
and damage.
If they are worn as illustrated or damaged, replace the
sprocket, and inspect the drive chain wear.
Worn Tooth (Engine Sprocket) [A]
Worn Tooth (Rear Sprocket) [B]
Direction of Rotation [C]
NOTE
If a sprocket requires replacement, the chain is proba-
bly worn also. When replacing a sprocket, inspect the
chain.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


PERIODIC MAINTENANCE 2-31
Periodic Maintenance Procedures
Rear Sprocket Warp (Runout) Inspection
Using the jack, raise the rear wheel off the ground.
Special Tools - Jack: 57001-1238
Jack Attachment: 57001-1608
Set a dial gauge [A] against the rear sprocket [B] near the
teeth as shown.
Rotate [C] the rear wheel slowly to measure the sprocket
warp (runout).
The difference between the highest and lowest dial gauge
readings is the amount of warp (runout).
Rear Sprocket Warp (Runout)
Standard: TIR 0.4 mm (0.016 in.) or less
Service Limit: TIR 0.5 mm (0.020 in.)
If the runout exceeds the service limit, replace the rear
sprocket.
Drive Chain Guide, Guide Roller, Chain Slipper
Wear Inspection
Visually inspect the drive chain guide [A] and replace it if
excessively worn or damaged.

Visually inspect the upper and lower chain guide rollers


[A] and replace them if excessively worn or damaged.

Visually inspect the chain slipper [A] on the swingarm and


replace it if excessively worn or damaged.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


2-32 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
Periodic Maintenance Procedures
Brakes
Brake Lever and Pedal Adjustment
Slide the dust cover [A].
Loosenthethebrake
Adjust lever [B] to suit the riders preference.
locknut [C] and turn the adjuster [D] to either
side.
After adjustment, tighten the locknut.
WARNING
An improperly adjusted brake could drag and cause
the brake to overheat, damaging the brake assem-
bly and possibily locking the rear wheel, resulting
in loss of control. Always maintain the proper brake
adjustment.

NOTE
Usually it is not necessary to adjust the pedal position,
but always adjust it when the master cylinder is disas-
sembled or pedal position is incorrect.

Measure the length [A].


Rear Master Cylinder Push Rod Length
Standard: 57.5 mm (2.26 in.)
If it is not within the standard, adjust the push rod in the
master cylinder as follows.

Loosen the push rod locknut [A].


Turn the adjusting bolt [B] to obtain the specified length.
Tighten the locknut.
Torque - Rear Master Cylinder Push Rod Locknut: 17.5 Nm
(1.78 kgfm, 12.9 ftlb)

Brake Fluid Level Inspection


Front Brake Reservoir
Check the brake fluid level in the front brake reservoir [A]
and the front reservoir must be kept above the lower level
line [B].
NOTE
Hold the reservoir horizontal when checking brake fluid
level.
If the brake fluid in the front brake reservoir is below the
lower level line, check for fluid leaks in the brake line.
If the brake fluid in the front brake reservoir is below the
lower level line, fill the brake fluid to the upper level line
as follows.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


PERIODIC MAINTENANCE 2-33
Periodic Maintenance Procedures
Remove:
Screws [A]
Brake Reservoir Cap [B]
Diaphragm

Inside the reservoir [A] is stopped end showing the upper


level line [B].
WARNING
Mixing brands and types of brake fluid can reduce
the brake systems effectiveness and cause an ac-
cident resulting in injury or death. Do not mix two
brands of brake fluid. Change the brake fluid in the
brake line completely if the brake fluid must be re-
filled but the type and brand of the brake fluid that
is already in the reservoir are unidentified.

Recommended Disc Brake Fluid


Grade: DOT3 or DOT4
Install the diaphragm and reservoir cap.
Tighten:
Torque - Front Brake Reservoir Cap Screws: 1.5 Nm (0.15
kgfm, 13 inlb)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


2-34 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
Periodic Maintenance Procedures
Rear Brake Reservoir
Check the brake fluid level in the rear brake reservoir [A]
and the rear reservoir must always be kept the upper level
line [B].
NOTE
Hold the reservoir horizontal when checking brake fluid
level.
If the brake fluid is below the upper level line, check for
fluid leaks in the brake line.
If the brake fluid is below the upper level line, fill the brake
fluid to the upper level line as follows.
Remove:
Rear Brake Reservoir Mounting Bolt and Washer [C]
Rear Brake Reservoir
Rear Brake Reservoir Cap [D]
WARNING
Mixing brands and types of brake fluid can reduce
the brake systems effectiveness and cause an ac-
cident resulting in injury or death. Do not mix two
brands of brake fluid. Change the brake fluid in the
brake line completely if the brake fluid must be re-
filled but the type and brand of the brake fluid that
is already in the reservoir are unidentified.

Recommended Disc Brake Fluid


Grade: DOT4

Follow procedure below to install the rear brake fluid


reservoir cap correctly.
First, tighten the rear brake fluid reservoir cap [B] clock-
wise [C] by hand until slight resistance is felt indicating
that the cap is seated on the reservoir body, then tighten
the cap an additional 1/6 turn [D] while holding the brake
fluid reservoir body [A].
Install:
Rear Brake Reservoir
Rear Brake Reservoir Mounting Bolt and Washer

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


PERIODIC MAINTENANCE 2-35
Periodic Maintenance Procedures
Brake Fluid Change
WARNING
When working with the disc brake, observe the pre-
cautions listed below.
Never reuse old brake fluid.
Do not use fluid from a container that has been left
unsealed or that has been open for a long time.
Do not mix two types and brands of fluid for use
in the brake. This lowers the brake fluid boiling
point and could cause the brake to be ineffective.
It may also cause the rubber brake parts to dete-
riorate.
Dont leave the reservoir cap off for any length of
time to avoid moisture contamination of the fluid.
Dont change the fluid in the rain or when a strong
wind is blowing.
Except for the disc pads and disc, use only disc
brake fluid, isopropyl alcohol, or ethyl alcohol for
cleaning of the brake parts. Do not use any other
fluid for cleaning these parts. Gasoline, engine
oil, or any other petroleum distillate will cause de-
terioration of the rubber parts. Oil spilled on any
part will be difficult to wash off completely and will
eventually deteriorate the rubber used in the disc
brake.
When handling the disc pads or disc, be careful
that no disc brake fluid or any oil gets on them.
Clean off any fluid or oil that inadvertently gets on
the pads or disc with a high flash-point solvent.
Do not use one which will leave an oily residue.
Replace the pads with new ones if they cannot be
cleaned satisfactorily.
Brake fluid quickly ruins painted surfaces; any
spilled fluid should be completely wiped up im-
mediately.
If any of the brake line fittings or the bleed valve is
opened at any time, the AIR MUST BE BLED FROM
THE BRAKE LINE.

Recommended Disc Brake Fluid


Grade:
Front DOT3 or DOT4
Rear DOT4

Level the brake fluid reservoir.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


2-36 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
Periodic Maintenance Procedures
Front Brake Reservoir
Remove:
Screws [A]
Brake Reservoir Cap [B]
Diaphragm

Rear Brake Reservoir


Remove:
Rear Brake Reservoir Mounting Bolt and Washer [A]
Brake Reservoir [B]
Brake Reservoir Cap [C]

NOTE
The procedure to change the front brake fluid is as fol-
lows. Changing the rear brake fluid is the same as for
the front brake.

Remove the rubber cap [A] on the bleed valve [B].

Attach a clear plastic hose [A] to the bleed valve on the


caliper, and run the other end of the hose into a container.
Fill the reservoir with fresh specified brake fluid.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


PERIODIC MAINTENANCE 2-37
Periodic Maintenance Procedures

Change the brake fluid as follows:


Repeat this operation until fresh brake fluid comes out
from the plastic hose or the color of the fluid changes.
1. Open the bleed valve [A].
2. Apply the brake and hold it [B].
3. Close the bleed valve [C].
4. Release the brake [D].
WARNING
Mixing brands and types of brake fluid can reduce
the brake systems effectiveness and cause an ac-
cident resulting in injury or death. Do not mix two
brands of brake fluid. Change the brake fluid in the
brake line completely if the brake fluid must be re-
filled but the type and brand of the brake fluid that
is already in the reservoir are unidentified.

NOTE
The fluid level must be checked often during the chang-
ing operation and replenished with fresh brake fluid. If
the fluid in the reservoir runs out any time during the
changing operation, the brakes will need to be bled
since air will have entered the brake line.

Remove the clear plastic hose.


Front Brake Reservoir
Install the diaphragm and reservoir cap.
Tighten:
Torque - Front Brake Reservoir Cap Screws: 1.5 Nm (0.15
kgfm, 13 inlb)

Rear Brake Reservoir


Follow procedure below to install the rear brake fluid
reservoir cap correctly.
First, tighten the rear brake fluid reservoir cap [B] clock-
wise [C] by hand until slight resistance is felt indicating
that the cap is seated on the reservoir body, then tighten
the cap an additional 1/6 turn [D] while holding the brake
fluid reservoir body [A].
Install:
Rear Brake Reservoir
Rear Brake Reservoir Mounting Bolt and Washer

Tighten the bleed valve, and install the rubber cap.


Torque - Bleed Valve: 7.8 Nm (0.80 kgfm, 69 inlb)
After changing the fluid, check the brake for good braking
power, no brake drag, and no fluid leakage.
If necessary, bleed the air from the lines (see Brake Line
Bleeding in the Brakes chapter).

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


2-38 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
Periodic Maintenance Procedures
Brake Pad Wear Inspection
Check the lining thickness [A] and condition of the brake
pads in each caliper.
NOTE
It is able to check with the pads installed.
If either pad is damaged, replace both pads in the caliper
as a set.
Brake Pad Lining Thickness
Standard: 4.0 mm (0.16 in.)
Service Limit: 1 mm (0.04 in.) [B]
If the lining thickness of either pad is less than the service
limit, replace both pads in the caliper as a set.
Brake Master Cylinder Rubber Parts Replacement
Front Master Cylinder Disassembly
Remove:
Front Master Cylinder (see Front Master Cylinder Re-
moval in the Brakes chapter)
Reservoir Cap and Diaphragm (see Brake Fluid
Change)
Pour the brake fluid into a container.
Remove:
Brake Lever Pivot Bolt and Locknut
Brake Lever
Dust Cover
Retainer (use the inside circlip pliers: 57001-143)
Piston complete with Secondary Cup, Primary Cup and
Spring
NOTICE
Do not remove the secondary cup from the piston
since removal will damage them.

[A] Dust Cover


[B] Retainer
[C] Washer
[D] Piston
[E] Secondary Cup
[F] Primary Cup
[G] Return Spring
Special Tool - Inside Circlip Pliers: 57001-143

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


PERIODIC MAINTENANCE 2-39
Periodic Maintenance Procedures
Rear Master Cylinder Disassembly
NOTE
Do not remove the push rod clevis for master cylinder
disassembly since removal requires brake pedal posi-
tion adjustment.

Remove:
Rear Master Cylinder (see Rear Master Cylinder Re-
moval in the Brakes chapter)
Reservoir Cap (see Brake Fluid Change)
Pour the brake fluid into a container.
Remove:
Dust Cover on Push Rod
Retainer (use the inside circlip pliers: 57001-143)
Push Rod with Clevis installed
Piston complete with Secondary Cup, Primary Cup and
Spring
NOTICE
Do not remove the secondary cup from the piston
since removal will damage them.

[A] Dust Cover


[B] Push Rod
[C] Retainer
[D] Piston Stop
[E] Piston
[F] Secondary Cup
[G] Primary Cup
[H] Return Spring
[I] Circlip
[J] Connector
[K] O-ring
Special Tool - Inside Circlip Pliers: 57001-143

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


2-40 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
Periodic Maintenance Procedures
Master Cylinder Assembly
Before assembly, clean all parts including the master
cylinder with brake fluid or alcohol.
NOTICE
Except for the disc pads and disc, use only disc
brake fluid, isopropyl alcohol, or ethyl alcohol for
cleaning of the brake parts. Do not use any other
fluid for cleaning of these parts. Gasoline, engine
oil, or any other petroleum distillate will cause de-
terioration of the rubber parts. Oil spilled on any
part will be difficult to wash off completely, and will
eventually deteriorate the rubber used in the disc
brake.

Apply brake fluid to the removed parts and to the inner


wall of the cylinder.
Take care not to scratch the piston assy and the inner wall
of the cylinder.
Apply
parts.
silicone grease (ex. PBC grease) to the following

Brake Lever Pivot Bolt (Front)


Brake Lever Contact (Front)
Push Rod Contact
Dust Covers
Tighten:
Torque - Brake Lever Pivot Bolt Locknut: 5.9 Nm (0.60
kgfm, 52 inlb)

Caliper Rubber Parts Replacement


Front Caliper Disassembly
Remove:
Front Caliper (see Caliper Removal in the Brakes chap-
ter)
Brake Pads (see Brake Pad Removal in the Brakes
chapter)

Separate the caliper holder [A] from the caliper [B].


Remove the anti-rattle springs [C].

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


PERIODIC MAINTENANCE 2-41
Periodic Maintenance Procedures

Using compressed air, remove the pistons.


remove the pistons is as follows.
One way to

Cover the caliper opening with a clean heavy cloth [A].


Remove the pistons by lightly applying compressed air [B]
to the hose joint opening.
WARNING
The piston in the brake caliper can crush hands and
fingers. Never place your hand or fingers in front of
the piston.

Pull out the pistons [A] on each cylinder by hand.


der. the dust seal [B] and fluid seal [C] on each cylin-
Remove

Remove the bleed valve and rubber cap.

Rear Caliper Disassembly


Remove:
Rear Caliper (see Caliper Removal in the Brakes chap-
ter)
Brake Pads (see Brake Pad Removal in the Brakes
chapter)

Separate the caliper holder [A] from the caliper [B].


Remove the anti-rattle spring [C].

Using compressed air, remove the piston.


Cover the caliper opening with a clean heavy cloth [A].
Remove the piston by lightly applying compressed air [B]
to the hose joint opening.
WARNING
The piston in the brake caliper can crush hands and
fingers. Never place your hand or fingers in front of
the piston.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


2-42 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
Periodic Maintenance Procedures

Pull out the piston [A] by hand.


Remove the dust seal [B] and fluid seal [C].
Remove the bleed valve and rubber cap.

Caliper Assembly
Clean the caliper parts except for the pads.
NOTICE
For cleaning of the parts, use only disc brake fluid,
isopropyl alcohol, or ethyl alcohol.
If you removed the bleed valve, install the bleed valve and
rubber cap.
Torque - Bleed Valve: 7.8 Nm (0.80 kgfm, 69 inlb)

Replace the fluid seal(s) [A] with new ones.


Apply silicone grease to the fluid seal(s), and install them
into the cylinder(s) by hand.
Replace the dust seal(s) [B] with new ones.
Apply brake fluid to the dust seal(s), and install them into
the cylinder(s) by hand.
Apply brake fluid to the outside of the piston(s) [C], and
push them into each cylinder by hand.
[D] Front Caliper
[E] Rear Caliper

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


PERIODIC MAINTENANCE 2-43
Periodic Maintenance Procedures

Install the anti-rattle spring(s) [A].


[B] Front Caliper
[C] Rear Caliper

Replace the friction boot(s) [A] and dust boot [B] if they
are damaged.
Apply a thin coat of PBC (Poly Butyl Cuprysil) grease to
the caliper holder shaft(s) [C] and holder holes (PBC is a
special high-temperature, water-resistance grease).
Assemble the caliper and caliper holder.
[D] Front Caliper
[E] Rear Caliper

Install the pads (see Brake Pad Installation in the Brakes


chapter).
Install
chapter).
the caliper (see Caliper Installation in the Brakes

Wipe
cloth.
up any spilled brake fluid on the caliper with wet

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


2-44 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
Periodic Maintenance Procedures
Brake Hoses and Connections Inspection
Inspect the brake hose and
cracks and signs of leakage.
fittings for deterioration,

The high pressure inside the brake line can cause fluid to
leak [A] or the hose to burst if the line is not properly main-
tained. Bend and twist the rubber hose while examining
it.
Replace the hose if any cracks [B] or bulges [C] are no-
ticed.
Tighten any loose fittings.

Brake Hose Replacement


NOTICE
Brake fluid quickly ruins painted surfaces; any
spilled fluid should be completely washed away
immediately.

Front Brake Hose


Remove:
Brake Hose Clamp Bolts [A]
Brake Hose Clamps [B]

Rear Brake Hose


Remove:
Caliper Guard Mounting Bolts [A]
Caliper Guard [B]
Screws [C]
Brake Hose Clamp [D]

Remove:
Screws [A]
Brake Hose Clamp [B]
Rear Master Cylinder Mounting Bolts [C]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


PERIODIC MAINTENANCE 2-45
Periodic Maintenance Procedures

Remove the front/rear brake hose banjo bolts [A] and


washers [B].
Replace the washers with new ones.
When removing the brake hose, take care not to spill the
brake fluid on the painted or plastic parts.
When removing the brake hose, temporarily secure the
end of the brake hose to some high place to keep fluid
loss to a minimum.

When installing the hoses, avoid sharp bending, kink-


ing, flattening or twisting, and run the hoses according to
Cable, Wire, and Hose Routing section in the Appendix
chapter.
Tighten:
Torque - Brake Hose Banjo Bolts: 25 Nm (2.5 kgfm, 18
ftlb)
Install the removed parts (see appropriate chapters).
Brake Line
Bleed the brake line after installing the brake hose (see
Bleeding in the Brakes chapter).

Suspension
Front Fork Inspection
Visually inspect the front fork for oil leakage, scoring or
scratches on the outer surface of the inner tubes [A].
Holding the brake lever, pump the front fork back and forth
manually to check for smooth operation.
If the fork shown damages or oil leak, replace the dam-
aged parts.
If the fork rattles, inspect the oil level or tightening torque.
NOTICE
If the inner tube is badly bent or creased, replace
it. Excessive bending, followed by subsequent
straightening, can weaken the inner tube.

Front Fork Oil Change


Remove the number plate (see Number Plate Removal in
the Frame chapter).
Loosen the front fork top plug [A].
Suspension
Remove the front forks (see Front Fork Removal in the
chapter).
Thoroughly clean the fork before disassembly.
NOTICE
Be careful not scratch the inner tube and not to
damage the dust seal.
Avoid scratching or damaging the inner tube or the
dust seal. Use a mild detergent and sponge out dirt
with plenty of water.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


2-46 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
Periodic Maintenance Procedures

Take the top plug [A] with the push rod off.
Compress the outer tube [B].

Press [A] the fork spring [B] away from the top plug and
slip the fork spring holder [C] on top of the spring seat and
under the push rod nut [D].
Special Tool - Fork Spring Holder: 57001-1286

Hold the front fork tube [A] upside down over a clean con-
tainer [B] and drain the oil.
NOTE
Pump the push rod [C] up and down to discharge the
fork oil.

Hold the front fork [A] at the inverted position for more
than 20 minutes to allow the fork oil to fully drain.

Clean the threads [A] of the front fork cylinder unit [B] and
front fork compression valve assembly [C].
Hold the front fork cylinder unit upright with the piston rod
fully stretched.
Pour the specified oil.
Suspension Oil - KHL15-10 (1L): 44091-0004
KHL15-10 (4L): 44091-0011

Fork Oil Amount (completely dry)


310 4 mL (10.5 0.1 US oz)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


PERIODIC MAINTENANCE 2-47
Periodic Maintenance Procedures
NOTE
While doing this, take care to keep the oil level topped
off that it stays above the two large holes [A] near the
top of the inner tube [B].

Screw
rod.
the fork piston rod puller [A] onto the end of the

Special Tool - Fork Piston Rod Puller, M10 1.0: 57001


-1298
Purge the air from the fork cylinder by gently moving the
piston rod up and down several times.

Purge the air from between the inner [A] and outer [B]
tubes by pumping the outer tube up and down [C].
NOTICE
Never extend the fork fully, oil will be forced from
between the tubes into the inner tube through the
holes at the top of it. This raised the oil level in the
inner tube. If the fork is extended to the full length
of its normal travel, the oil level will be raised about
30 mm (1.18 in.).

After purging the air from the assembly, let it sit for about
five minutes so that any suspended air bubbles can sur-
face.
Check the oil level.
With the fork fully compressed, put the oil level gauge [A]
on the top of the tube [B].
Inspect the distance from the top of the outer tube to the
oil.
Special Tool - Fork Oil Level Gauge: 57001-1290

NOTE
The gauge tube is graduated in 1 cm division.
The gauge body is graduated in 10 mL (0.134 US oz)
division, excluding the gauge tube of about 5 mL (0.17
US oz) capacity.

Oil Level (fully compressed, without spring)


Standard: 95 2 mm (3.74 0.08 in.)
Adjustable Range: 75 115 mm (2.95 4.53 in.)

Install the removed parts (see appropriate chapters).


Tighten:
Torque - Front Fork Top Plug: 28 Nm (2.9 kgfm, 21 ftlb)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


2-48 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
Periodic Maintenance Procedures
Rear Shock Absorber Oil Change
The oil should be changed in the rear shock absorber
in accordance with the Periodic Maintenance Chart. The
frequency for best performance must be based upon riding
conditions and rider ability.
The disassembly procedure is included in the oil change
procedure.
Disassembly for Oil Change
Remove the rear shock absorber (see Rear Shock Ab-
sorber Removal in the Suspension chapter).
Remove the shock absorber spring (see Rear Shock Ab-
sorber Spring Replacement in the Suspension chapter).

Insert a suitable tool to hole [A] of the reservoir cap, and


release the nitrogen gas completely (keep the suitable
tool inserted).
For instructions on how to use the tool, follow the opera-
tion manual provided by the manufacturer.
WARNING
The shock contains high-pressure nitrogen gas that
when suddenly released can eject oil and internal
shock parts at high velocity, causing serious injury.
To avoid injury, do not point a suitable tool toward
your face or body when releasing nitrogen gas pres-
sure since an oil mist is often released with the ni-
trogen. Always release nitrogen gas pressure be-
fore disassembling the rear shock absorber to pre-
vent explosive separation of parts.

Hold the lower of the rear shock absorber with a vise.


bound damping
Adjust the compression damping adjuster [A] and re-
adjuster [B] to the softest position.

Tap the notches [A] on the stopper [B] with suitable tools
to free the stopper from the rear shock body [C].

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


PERIODIC MAINTENANCE 2-49
Periodic Maintenance Procedures

Slide up the stopper of the piston rod, then push the oil
seal [A] to remove the circlip [B].
Remove the circlip.

Wrap a heavy cloth around the rear shock body [A] and
piston rod to prevent the oil diffusion.
Lightly move the piston rod back and forth, and pull out
the piston rod assembly [B].
Drain the oil.

Push the gas reservoir cap [A] to remove the circlip [B].

Remove:
Circlip [A]
Gas Reservoir Cap [B] with Bladder
Drain the remains oil.

Visually inspect the piston [A], O-ring [B], and oil seal as-
sembly [C].
If the piston, O-ring and oil seal assembly are badly
scored, rusty or damaged, replace the piston rod assem-
bly with a new one.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


2-50 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
Periodic Maintenance Procedures
Assembly for Oil Change
Check that the bladder [A] on the gas reservoir cap [B] is
not partially collapsed.
If it is, push down the valve core with a standard tip screw-
driver.
Check the bladder for sign of damage or crack.
If necessary, replace it with a new one.
NOTICE
Do not use a damaged or partially collapsed blad-
der, because it may burst, gently reducing rear
shock performance.

Apply grease to the lip [C] of the bladder and install it on


the gas reservoir cap.
Push the bladder into the gas reservoir slowly until it just
clears the circlip groove. Wipe out any spilled oil.
Replace the circlip with a new one.
Mount the circlip in the groove in the gas reservoir.
WARNING
Pressurized nitrogen gas can explode out of the
shock reservoir cap if a weakened, deformed or
flawed circlip is used, allowing oil and internal parts
to burst out of the reservoir with great force and
cause serious injury. To avoid injury, always use a
new circlip whenever the shock is reassembled.

Pour the specified oil into the rear shock body so that the
distance [A] from the rear shock body lower end to the oil
level is about 50 mm (1.97 in.).
Suspension Oil - KHV10-K2C (1L): 45024-0002
Amount:
162 mL (5.48 US oz.)

Hold the upper portion of the rear shock absorber in a vise


with soft jaws or heavy cloth.
Apply shock absorber oil to the bushing and O-ring of the
piston rod assembly [A].
Insert the piston end of the piston rod assembly into the
rear shock body [B] slowly.
Do not insert the oil seal assembly [C] yet.
Purge the air from rear shock body by slowly pumping the
piston rod assembly in and out.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


PERIODIC MAINTENANCE 2-51
Periodic Maintenance Procedures

Push the oil seal assembly into the rear shock body until
it just clears the circlip groove.
Replace the circlip [A] with a new one.
Pull up [C] theinto
Fit the circlip the groove in the rear shock body [B].
piston rod assembly [D] against the circlip.
NOTICE
If the circlip is not a certain fit in the groove in the
rear shock body, the piston rod assembly may come
out of the shock absorber when injecting the nitro-
gen gas or riding the motorcycle.

Force the stopper [A] into the rear shock body [B] by lightly
tapping around the edge of the stopper with a plastic mal-
let [C].
Fully extend the piston rod assembly.

Pull up the gas reservoir cap [A] against the circlip [B].
Hold theslowly
Pump the piston rod assembly up and down.
jaws or heavy cloth
lower of the piston assembly in a vice with soft
to allow to the air to rise in upper of
the rear shock body.

Remove the compression damping adjuster [A].

Remount the upper portion of the shock absorber in a vise


with soft jaws or heavy cloth.
Add the specified oil up to the damping adjuster assembly
hole neck [A].

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


2-52 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
Periodic Maintenance Procedures

Purge the air from between the gas reservoir [A] and rear
shock body [B] by slowly pumping the piston rod [C] in
and out.

Replace the O-ring [A] with a new one and apply shock
absorber oil.
Install the compression damping adjuster [B] slowly.
Tighten:
Torque - Compression Damping Adjuster: 17.5 Nm (1.78
kgfm, 12.9 ftlb)
Wipe
rod.
off all oil from the shock absorber body and piston

Fully extend the piston rod assembly.


kgf/cm,the7 psi)
Inject nitrogen gas to a pressure of 50 kPa (0.5
through the gas reservoir cap hole.
Check the rear shock body and gas reservoir for oil and
gas leaks. If there are leaks, reassemble the related
parts.

Inject the nitrogen gas up to the 980 kPa (10.0 kgf/cm,


142 psi) pressure.
WARNING
High pressure gas is dangerous and can explode,
causing serious injury. To avoid injury, have a qual-
ified mechanic pressurize the shock reservoir with
nitrogen gas only. Do not use air or other gases,
since they may cause premature wear, rust, fire haz-
ard or substandard performance.

Install the spring (see Rear Shock Absorber Spring Re-


placement).
Install the rear shock absorber (see Rear Shock Absorber
Installation in the Suspension chapter).
Adjust the spring preload (see Spring Preload Adjustment
in the Suspension chapter).
Install the removed parts (see appropriate chapters).
Swingarm and Uni-Trak Linkage Inspection
Check the uni-trak component parts for wear periodically,
or whenever excessive play is suspected.
Using the jack under the frame, raise the rear wheel off
the ground.
Special Tools - Jack: 57001-1238
Jack Attachment: 57001-1608

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


PERIODIC MAINTENANCE 2-53
Periodic Maintenance Procedures

Pump the seat down and up [A] 4 or 5 times, and inspect


the smooth stroke.
If the uni-trak linkage does not smooth stroke or noise is
found, inspect the uni-trak linkage bearings.

Push and pull on the swingarm [A] to check for wear.


A small amount of play on the swingarm is normal and no
corrective action is needed. However, if excessive play is
felt, remove the uni-trak parts from the frame and check
for wear.

Swingarm and Uni-Trak Linkage Pivot Lubrication


Refer to the Swingarm Bearing Installation and Rocker
Arm Bearing Installation in the Suspension chapter.

Steering
Steering Inspection
Using the jack, raise the front wheel off the ground.
Special Tools - Jack: 57001-1238
Jack Attachment: 57001-1608
With the front wheel pointing straight ahead, alternately
nudge each end of the handlebars.
The front wheel should swing fully to left and right from
the force of gravity until the fork hits the stop.
If the steering binds or catches before the stop, check the
routing of the cables, hoses, and harnesses.
If the steering feels tight, adjust or lubricate the steering.

Squatting in front of the motorcycle, grasp the lower ends


of the front fork at the axle, and push and pull [A] the front
fork back and forth.
If play is felt, the steering is too loose and needs to be
adjusted.

Steering Adjustment
Using the jack, raise the front wheel off the ground.
Special Tools - Jack: 57001-1238
Jack Attachment: 57001-1608

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


2-54 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
Periodic Maintenance Procedures

Remove:
Number Plate (see Number Plate Removal in the Frame
chapter)
Handlebars (see Handlebar Removal in the Steering
chapter)
Loosen the front fork clamp bolts (upper) on both sides.

Loosen the steering stem head nut [A].


wrench [C]steering
Turn the stem nut [B] with the steering stem nut
to obtain the proper adjustment.
If the steering is too tight, loosen the stem nut a fraction of
a turn; if the steering is too loose, tighten the nut a fraction
of a turn.
Special Tool - Steering Stem Nut Wrench: 57001-1100

NOTE
Turn the nut 1/8 turn at a time maximum.
Tighten:
Torque - Steering Stem Head Nut: 64 Nm (6.5 kgfm, 47
ftlb)
Front Fork Clamp Bolts (Upper): 20 Nm (2.0
kgfm, 15 ftlb)

Check the steering again.


If the steering is too tight or too loose, repeat the adjust-
ment as mentioned above.
Install the removed parts (see appropriate chapters).
Steering Stem Bearing Lubrication
Remove the steering stem (see Steering Stem, Stem
Bearing Removal in the Steering chapter).
Using a high flash-point solvent, wash the upper and
lower tapered rollers in the cages, and wipe the upper
and lower outer races, which are press-fitted into the
frame head pipe, clean off grease and dirt.
Visually inspect the outer races and rollers.
Replace the bearing assemblies if they show wear or
damage.
Pack the upper and lower tapered roller bearings [A] in
the cages with grease, and apply a light coat of grease to
the upper and lower outer races.
Install the steering stem (see Steering Stem, Stem Bear-
ing Installation in the Steering chapter).
Adjust the steering (see Steering Adjustment).

Frame
Frame Inspection
Clean the frame with steam cleaner.
dents, bending,
Visually inspect the frame and rear frame for cracks,
or warp.
If there is any damage to the frame, replace it.
WARNING
A repaired frame may fail in use, possibly causing
an accident resulting in injury or death. If the frame
is bent, dented, cracked, or warped, replace it.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


PERIODIC MAINTENANCE 2-55
Periodic Maintenance Procedures
Electrical System
Spark Plug Cleaning and Inspection
Clean the cylinder head around the spark plug before re-
moving the spark plug.
Remove the spark plug cap [A].
Remove the spark plug [B].
Clean the spark plug, preferably in a sandblasting device,
and then clean off any abrasive particles. The plug may
also be cleaned using a high flash-point solvent and a
nonmetal brush (nylon etc.).
If the spark plug electrodes are corroded or damaged,
or if the insulator is cracked, replace the plug. Use the
standard spark plug.

Measure the gap [A] with a wire-type thickness gauge.


If the gap is incorrect, carefully bend the side electrode
[B] with a suitable tool to obtain the correct gap.
Spark Plug Gap
Standard: 0.7 0.8 mm (0.028 0.031 in.)

Install the spark plug finger-tighten it first.


Tighten:
Torque - Spark Plug: 25.5 Nm (2.60 kgfm, 18.8 inlb)
Install the spark plug cap (see Ignition Coil Installation in
the Electrical System chapter).
Pull up the spark plug cap lightly to make sure of the in-
stallation of the plug cap.
Spark Plug Replacement
Refer to the Spark Plug Cleaning and Inspection.
General Lubrication and Cable Inspection
Lubrication
Before lubricating each part, clean off any rusty spots with
rust remover and wipe off any grease, oil, dirt, or grime.
Lubricate the points listed below with indicated lubricant.
NOTE
Whenever the vehicle has been operated under
wet or rainy conditions, or especially after using a
high-pressure water spray, perform the general lubri-
cation.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


2-56 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
Periodic Maintenance Procedures
Points: Lubricate with Grease.
Clutch Inner Cable Upper and Lower Ends [A]
Throttle Inner Cable Upper End
Brake Lever Pivot Bolt
Clutch Lever Pivot Bolt
Brake Pedal Bolt

Cables: Lubricate with Rust Inhibitor.


Throttle Inner Cable
Clutch Inner Cable

Pivots: Lubricate with engine oil.


Rear Master Cylinder Joint Pin
Cable Inspection
With the cable disconnected at the both ends, the cable
should move freely [A] within the cable housing.
If cable movement is not free after lubricating, if the cable
is frayed [B], or if the cable housing is kinked [C], replace
the cable.

Nut, Bolt, and Fastener Tightness Inspection


Tightness Inspection
Check the tightness of the bolts and nuts listed here in
accordance with the Periodic Maintenance Chart. Also,
check to see that each cotter pin is in place and in good
condition.
NOTE
For the engine fasteners, check the tightness of them
when the engine is cold (at room temperature).

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


PERIODIC MAINTENANCE 2-57
Periodic Maintenance Procedures
If there are loose fasteners, retighten them to the spec-
ified torque following the specified tightening sequence.
Refer to the Torque and Locking Agent section in this
chapter for torque specifications. For each fastener, first
loosen it by 1/2 turn, then tighten it.
If cotter pins are damaged, replace them with new ones.
Nut, Bolt and Fastener to be checked
Wheels:
Spoke Nipples
Bead Protector Nut
Front Axle Nut Cotter Pin
Front Axle Nut
Front Axle Clamp Bolts
Rear Axle Nut Cotter Pin
Rear Axle Nut
Final Drive:
Chain Adjuster Locknut
Rear Sprocket Nuts
Brakes:
Front Master Cylinder Clamp Bolts
Brake Lever Pivot Bolt Locknut
Front Caliper Mounting Bolts
Brake Pedal Bolt
Rear Master Cylinder Push Rod Cotter Pin
Rear Master Cylinder Mounting Bolts
Rear Caliper Holder Shaft
Rear Caliper Holder Nut
Rear Caliper Mounting Bolts
Suspension:
Front Fork Clamp Bolts
Rear Shock Absorber Mounting Bolts
Swingarm Pivot Shaft Nut
Uni-Trak Link Nuts
Steering:
Steering Stem Head Nut
Handlebar Holder Bolts
Engine:
Throttle Cable Adjuster Locknut
Engine Mounting Bolts, Nuts
Engine Bracket Mounting Bolts, Nuts
Shift Pedal Bolt
Clutch Cable Adjuster Locknut
Clutch Lever Pivot Bolt Locknut
Kick Pedal Bolt
Others:
Footpeg Cotter Pins
Rear Frame Pipe Nuts
Front Fender Bolts
Rear Fender Bolts
Rear Flap Bolts

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
FUEL SYSTEM 3-1

Fuel System
Table of Contents
Exploded View........................................................................................................................ 3-2
Specifications ......................................................................................................................... 3-6
Special Tool ............................................................................................................................ 3-7
Throttle Grip and Cable .......................................................................................................... 3-8 3
Throttle Grip (Throttle Cable) Free Play Inspection .......................................................... 3-8
Throttle Grip (Throttle Cable) Free Play Adjustment......................................................... 3-8
Throttle Cable Replacement ............................................................................................. 3-8
Throttle Cable Lubrication................................................................................................. 3-9
Throttle Cable Inspection .................................................................................................. 3-9
Carburetor .............................................................................................................................. 3-10
Idle Speed Adjustment...................................................................................................... 3-10
Main Jet Replacement Notes............................................................................................ 3-10
Service Fuel Level Inspection ........................................................................................... 3-10
Service Fuel Level Adjustment ......................................................................................... 3-11
Carburetor Removal.......................................................................................................... 3-12
Carburetor Installation....................................................................................................... 3-13
Carburetor Disassembly ................................................................................................... 3-14
Carburetor Assembly ........................................................................................................ 3-15
Carburetor Cleaning.......................................................................................................... 3-16
Carburetor Inspection ....................................................................................................... 3-16
Air Cleaner.............................................................................................................................. 3-18
Air Cleaner Case Removal ............................................................................................... 3-18
Air Cleaner Case Installation ............................................................................................ 3-18
Element Removal/Installation ........................................................................................... 3-18
Element Cleaning and Inspection ..................................................................................... 3-18
Fuel Tank ................................................................................................................................ 3-19
Fuel Tank Removal ........................................................................................................... 3-19
Fuel Tank Installation ........................................................................................................ 3-19
Fuel Tap Removal ............................................................................................................. 3-20
Fuel Tap Installation .......................................................................................................... 3-20
Fuel Tank and Tap Cleaning ............................................................................................. 3-20
Fuel Tap Inspection........................................................................................................... 3-20
Reed Valve ............................................................................................................................. 3-21
Reed Valve Removal ........................................................................................................ 3-21
Reed Valve Installation ..................................................................................................... 3-21
Reed Valve Inspection ...................................................................................................... 3-21
Fuel Hose ............................................................................................................................... 3-22
Fuel Hoses and Connections Inspection .......................................................................... 3-22

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


3-2 FUEL SYSTEM
Exploded View

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


FUEL SYSTEM 3-3
Exploded View

Torque
No. Fastener Remarks
Nm kgfm ftlb
1 Reed Valve Screws 1.0 0.10 8.9 inlb
2 Carburetor Holder Mounting Bolts 9.4 1.0 83 inlb
3 Carburetor Mounting Clamp Screw 1.5 0.15 13 inlb
CL: Apply cable lubricant.
G: Apply grease.
R: Replacement Parts

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


3-4 FUEL SYSTEM
Exploded View

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


FUEL SYSTEM 3-5
Exploded View

Torque
No. Fastener Remarks
Nm kgfm ftlb
1 Fuel Tank Screws 5.0 0.51 44 inlb
AD: Apply adhesive.
G: Apply grease.
O: Apply high-quality foam air filter oil.
R: Replacement Parts

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


3-6 FUEL SYSTEM
Specifications

Item Standard Service Limit


Throttle Grip and Cables
Throttle Grip Free Play 2 3 mm (0.08 0.12 in.)
Carburetor
Make/type KEIHIN PWK28
Main Jet #140
Main air jet #60
Throttle Valve Cutaway #3.5
Jet Needle:
KX85C/D NRJC
KX100F NRKC
Jet Needle Clip Position 3rd groove from the top
Pilot Jet (Slow jet) #38
Air Screw
KX85C/D 1 1/2 turns out
KX100F 1 7/8 turns out
Starter Jet #62
Service Fuel Level
1.0 1 mm (0.04 0.04 in.)
(below from the float bowl mating surface)
Float height 19.0 2 mm (0.75 0.08 in.)
Air Cleaner
Element Polyurethane foam
Element Oil High quality foam air filter oil
Reed Valve
Reed Warp 0.2 mm (0.008 in.)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


FUEL SYSTEM 3-7
Special Tool
Fuel Level Gauge, M18 1.0:
57001-122

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


3-8 FUEL SYSTEM
Throttle Grip and Cable
If the throttle grip has excessive free play due to cable
stretch or misadjustment, there will be a delay in throttle re-
sponse. Also, the throttle valve may not open fully at full
throttle. On the other hand, if the throttle grip has no play,
the throttle will be hard to control, and the idle speed will
be erratic. Check the throttle grip play periodically in accor-
dance with the Periodic Maintenance Chart, and adjust the
play if necessary.
The throttle cable routing is shown in Cable, Wire, and
Hose Routing section in the Appendix chapter.
Throttle Grip (Throttle Cable) Free Play Inspection
Refer to the Throttle Grip Free Play Inspection in the Pe-
riodic Maintenance chapter.
Throttle Grip (Throttle Cable) Free Play
Adjustment
Refer to the Throttle Grip Free Play Adjustment in the
Periodic Maintenance chapter.
Throttle Cable Replacement
Slide
[B].
out the rubber boot [A] and cable housing dust cover

Remove the screws [C] and throttle case cover [D].

Loosen the locknut [A] and turn in the adjuster [B].


Remove the
Remove upper end [C] of the throttle cable.
[D]. the adjuster and locknut from the throttle case

Remove:
Fuel Tank (see Fuel Tank Removal)
Bolt [A]
Band [B]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


FUEL SYSTEM 3-9
Throttle Grip and Cable

Remove:
Screws [A]
Carburetor Cap [B] with Throttle Valve Assembly

Free the lower end [A] of the throttle cable from the throttle
valve assembly.
Loosen the locknut [B] and adjuster [C] and remove the
throttle cable [D].

Lubricate the throttle cable (see Chassis Parts Lubrication


in the Periodic Maintenance chapter).
Install the throttle cable.
Run the throttle cable correctly (see Cable, Wire, and
Hose Routing section in the Appendix chapter).
After installation, adjust the throttle cable properly (see
Throttle Grip Free Play Adjustment in the Periodic Main-
tenance chapter).
WARNING
Operation with improperly adjusted, incorrectly
routed or damaged cables could result in an unsafe
riding condition. Follow the service manual to
make sure to correct any of these conditions.

Throttle Cable Lubrication


Refer to the Chassis Parts Lubrication in the Periodic
Maintenance chapter.
Throttle Cable Inspection
Refer to the Cable Inspection in the Periodic Maintenance
chapter.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


3-10 FUEL SYSTEM
Carburetor
Idle Speed Adjustment
Refer to the Idle Speed Adjustment in the Periodic Main-
tenance chapter.
Main Jet Replacement Notes
WARNING
Gasoline is extremely flammable and can be ex-
plosive under certain conditions. Always stop the
engine and do not smoke. Make sure the area is
well-ventilated and free from any source of flame
or sparks; this includes any appliance with a pilot
light.
Make sure the engine is cold before working. Wipe
any fuel off the engine before starting it.

Turn the fuel tap lever to the OFF position.


Place a container
Remove the carburetor (see Carburetor Removal).
Drain the fuel fromunder the fuel drain plug.
drain plug. the carburetor by removing the fuel

Replace the main jet [A] with the desired one.


Tighten the drain
Replace the drain plug O-ring with a new one.
Install the carburetor
plug securely.
(see Carburetor Installation).

Service Fuel Level Inspection


WARNING
Gasoline is extremely flammable and can be ex-
plosive under certain conditions. Always stop the
engine and do not smoke. Make sure the area is
well-ventilated and free from any source of flame
or sparks; this includes any appliance with a pilot
light.

Turn the fuel tap lever to the OFF position.


Fuel Tank (see Fuel Tank Removal)
Remove:

Carburetor (see Carburetor Removal)


The fuel hose and throttle cable do not have to be re-
moved to inspect the fuel level.
Hold the carburetor in true vertical position on a stand.
Put the fuel tank on a bench, and connect the fuel tap to
the carburetor using a suitable hose.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


FUEL SYSTEM 3-11
Carburetor

Remove the drain plug from the bottom of the float bowl,
and screw a fuel level gauge [A] into the plug hole.
Special Tool - Fuel Level Gauge, M18 1.0: 57001-122
Hold the gauge vertically against the side of the carbure-
tor body so that the zero line [C] is several millimeters
higher than the bottom edge [B] of the carburetor body.
Turn the fuel tap lever to the ON position to feed fuel to
the carburetor.
Wait until the fuel level in the gauge settles.
Keeping the gauge vertical, slowly lower the gauge until
the zero line is even with the bottom edge of the carbu-
retor body.
NOTE
Do not lower the zero line below the bottom edge
of the carburetor body. If the gauge is lowered and
then raised again, the fuel level gauge shows some-
what higher than the actual fuel level. If the gauge is
lowered too far, dump the fuel out of it into a suitable
container and start the procedure over again.

Read the fuel level [D] in the gauge and compare it to the
specification.
Service Fuel Level (below from the foat bowl mating
surface)
Standard: 1.0 1 mm (0.04 0.04 in.)
If the fuel level is incorrect, adjust it.
Turn the fuel tap lever to the OFF position and remove
the fuel level gauge.
Replace the drain plug O-ring with a new one.
Install the drain plug on the bottom of the float bowl.
Service Fuel Level Adjustment
WARNING
Gasoline is extremely flammable and can be ex-
plosive under certain conditions. Always stop the
engine and do not smoke. Make sure the area is
well-ventilated and free from any source of flame
or sparks; this includes any appliance with a pilot
light.

Remove the carburetor, and drain the fuel into a suitable


container (see Carburetor Removal).
Remove the float bowl (see Carburetor Disassembly).

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


3-12 FUEL SYSTEM
Carburetor

Drive out the pivot pin [A] and remove the float [B] with
float valve needle [C].

Bend the tang [A] on the float arm very slightly to change
the float height. Increasing the float height lowers the fuel
level and decreasing the float height raises the fuel level.
Float Height
Standard: 19.0 2 mm (0.75 0.08 in.)

NOTE
Float height [A] is the distance from the float bowl mat-
ing surface [B] of the carburetor body (with the gasket
removed) to the top of the float [C]. Measure the height
with the carburetor upside down.
Do not push the needle rod [D] in during the float height
measurement.

Assemble the carburetor, and recheck the fuel level.


If the fuel level cannot be adjusted by this method, the
float or the float valve is damaged.
Carburetor Removal
WARNING
Gasoline is extremely flammable and can be ex-
plosive under certain conditions. Always stop the
engine and do not smoke. Make sure the area is
well-ventilated and free from any source of flame
or sparks; this includes any appliance with a pilot
light.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


FUEL SYSTEM 3-13
Carburetor

Turn the fuel tap lever to the OFF position.


on thethemagnet
Free carburetor overflow hose [A] from the clamp [B]
cover.
Remove the upper end
Slide out the clamp [C] and disconnect the fuel hose [D].
Cable Replacement). of the throttle cable (see Throttle
Loosen the clamp screws [E].
duct [G], the
Remove carburetor [F] from the end of the air cleaner
and then pull it out of the carburetor holder [H].

Remove the screws [A], and pull out the throttle valve
assembly [B].
NOTICE
If the throttle valve is not removed from the cable,
wrap it in a clean cloth to avoid damage.

After removing the carburetor, cover the carburetor holder


and air cleaner duct with a clean cloth to protect them from
dirt.

WARNING
If dirt or dust is allowed to pass through into the
carburetor, the throttle may become stuck, possibly
causing accident. Replace the air cleaner element
according to the maintenance chart.

NOTICE
If dirt gets through into the engine, excessive en-
gine wear and possibly engine damage will occur.

Carburetor Installation
Being careful not to bend or otherwise damage the jet
needle [A], insert the throttle valve assembly [B] into the
carburetor body.
Check to see that the throttle valve goes all the way down
into the carburetor body, and slides smoothly.

Fit the projection [A] into the notch [B] on the carburetor
holder.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


3-14 FUEL SYSTEM
Carburetor

Install the clamps [A].


Tighten:
Torque - Carburetor Mounting Clamp Screw [B]: 1.5 Nm
(0.15 kgfm, 13 inlb)

Route the air vent and overflow hoses through the clamp
on the crankcase (see Cable, Wire and Hose Routing
Section in the Appendix chapter).
NOTICE
Always keep the hoses free of obstruction, and
make sure they do not get pinched by the chain or
shock absorber.

Turn the fuel tap lever to the ON position, and check for
fuel leakage from the carburetor.
WARNING
Fuel spilled from the carburetor is hazardous.
Adjust the following items if necessary:
Throttle Cable (see Throttle Grip Free Play Adjustment
in the periodic Maintenance chapter)
Idle Speed (see Idle Speed Adjustment in the periodic
Maintenance chapter)
Carburetor Disassembly
WARNING
Gasoline is extremely flammable and can be ex-
plosive under certain conditions. Always stop the
engine and do not smoke. Make sure the area is
well-ventilated and free from any source of flame
or sparks; this includes any appliance with a pilot
light.

Remove the carburetor (see Carburetor Removal).


Free the end ofthethethrottle
Disassemble valve assembly as follows.
throttle cable [A] from the hook [B] of
the throttle valve [C].

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


FUEL SYSTEM 3-15
Carburetor
Slide the jet needle [A] out of the throttle valve.
Pull out the snap ring [B], and remove the throttle cable
from the carburetor cap [C].
Remove the following parts from the carburetor body.
Choke Plunger Assembly [D]
Idle Adjusting Screw and Spring [E]
Air Screw and Spring [F]
Float Bowl [G]
Float [H]
Pivot Pin [I] (drive out)
Main Jet [J]
Float Valve [K]
Pilot Jet [L]
Main Jet Holder [M]
Needle Jet [N]
Spring [O]
Spring Seat [P]

Carburetor Assembly
Clean the disassembly parts.
NOTICE
Do not overtighten the jets. They could be damaged
requiring replacement.

Replace the float bowl O-ring and drain plug O-ring with
new ones.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


3-16 FUEL SYSTEM
Carburetor
Carburetor Cleaning
WARNING
Gasoline and low flash-point solvents can be
flammable and/or explosive and cause severe
burns. Clean the carburetor in a well-ventilated
area, and take care that there are no sparks or
flame anywhere near the working area; this in-
cludes any appliance with a pilot light. Do not use
gasoline or a low flash-point solvent to clean the
carburetor.

Make sure the fuel tap lever is in the OFF position.


Drain thethe
Remove carburetor (see Carburetor Removal).
Disassemble the
fuel in the carburetor.
bly). carburetor (see Carburetor Disassem-

NOTICE
Do not use compressed air on an assembled carbu-
retor, the float may be deformed by the pressure.
Remove as many rubber or plastic parts from the
carburetor as possible before cleaning the carbu-
retor with a cleaning solution. This will prevent
damage or deterioration of the parts. Do not use
a strong carburetor cleaning solution which could
attack the plastic parts; instead, use a mild high
flash-point cleaning solution safe for plastic parts.
Do not use wire or any other hard instrument to
clean carburetor parts, especially jets, as they may
be damaged.

Immerse all metal parts in a carburetor cleaning solution.


Blow through the
After the parts are cleaned, dry them with compressed air.
air [A]. air and fuel passages with compressed

Assemble the carburetor, and install it on the motorcycle


(see Carburetor Assembly/Installation).

Carburetor Inspection
WARNING
Gasoline is extremely flammable and can be ex-
plosive under certain conditions. Always stop the
engine and do not smoke. Make sure the area is
well ventilated and free from any source of flame
or sparks; this includes any appliance with a pilot
light.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


FUEL SYSTEM 3-17
Carburetor

Remove the carburetor (see Carburetor Removal).


(see Fuel Level Inspection).
Before disassembling the carburetor, check the fuel level

If the fuel level is incorrect, inspect the rest of the carbu-


retor before correcting it.
Pull the carburetor cable to check that the throttle valve
moves smoothly and returns by spring pressure.
If the throttle valve does not move smoothly, replace the
carburetor body so that it returns by spring force.

Clean the carburetor (see Carburetor Cleaning).


It shouldthebeplastic
Check tip [A] of the float valve needle [B].
smooth without any grooves, scratches, or
tears.
If the plastic tip is damaged [C], replace the needle.
Push the rod [D] in the valve, then release [E] it.
If the rod does not spring out, replace the valve.
Check the jet needle and needle jet for damage.
The damaged jet needle should be replaced.
If the needle jet is damaged, replace the carburetor body.
Check the starter jet in the float bowl for damage.
If the starter jet is damaged, replace the float bowl.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


3-18 FUEL SYSTEM
Air Cleaner
Air Cleaner Case Removal
Remove:
Seat (see Seat Removal in the Frame chapter)
Rear Fender (see Rear Fender Removal/Installation in
the Frame chapter)
Rear Frap (see Rear Flap Removal/Installation in the
Frame chapter)
Rear Frame Pipe (see Rear Frame Pipe Removal in the
Frame chapter)
Muffler (see Muffler Removal in the Engine Top End
chapter)
Loosen the clamp screw [A].
Remove the bolts [B].
Remove the air cleaner case [C] with air cleaner duct [D].
Air Cleaner Case Installation
Installation is the reverse of removal.
Element Removal/Installation
Refer to the Air Cleaner Element Cleaning and Inspection
in the Periodic Maintenance chapter.
Element Cleaning and Inspection
Refer to the Air Cleaner Element Cleaning and Inspection
in the Periodic Maintenance chapter.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


FUEL SYSTEM 3-19
Fuel Tank
Fuel Tank Removal
WARNING
Gasoline is extremely flammable and can be ex-
plosive under certain conditions. Always stop the
engine and do not smoke. Make sure the area is
well ventilated and free from any source of flame
or sparks; this includes any appliance with a pilot
light.

Remove:
Seat (see Seat Removal in the Frame chapter)
Shrouds (see Shroud Removal/Installation in the Frame
chapter)
Turn the fuel tap lever [A] to the OFF position.
Slide out the clamp [B] and pull off the fuel hose [C].
NOTICE
Take care not to give excessive forces to the fuel
hose to prevent damage. Do not use the pliers.

Remove the fuel tank mounting bolt [A] and the band [B].
Remove the fuel tank [C].

Fuel Tank Installation


Check that the dampers [A] are in place on the frame.
If the dampers are damaged or deteriorated, replace them
with new ones.

Install the fuel tank.


leaks. the fuel hose is clamped to the fuel tap to prevent
Be sure

Insert the fuel tank breather hose outlet end into the steer-
ing stem hole.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


3-20 FUEL SYSTEM
Fuel Tank
Fuel Tap Removal
Remove the fuel tank (see Fuel Tank Removal).
Remove the
Drain the fuel.
bolts [A] and take off the fuel tap [B].

Fuel Tap Installation


Replace the gasket [A] with a new one.
Turn the fuel
Install the fuel tap.
tap lever to the OFF position.

Fuel Tank and Tap Cleaning


Refer to the Fuel System Clean in the Periodic Mainte-
nance chapter.
Fuel Tap Inspection
Remove the fuel tap (see Fuel Tap Removal).
tion.
Check the fuel tap screen [A] for any breaks or deteriora-

If the fuel tap screen have any breaks or deteriorations, it


may allow dirt to reach the carburetor, causing poor run-
ning. Replace the fuel tap.
If the fuel tap leaks, or allows fuel to flow when it is at
OFF position, replace the damaged gasket [B] or fuel
tap.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


FUEL SYSTEM 3-21
Reed Valve
Reed Valve Removal
Remove:
Carburetor (see Carburetor Removal)
Carburetor Holder Mounting Bolts [A]
Clamp [B]
Carburetor Holder [C]
Reed Valve Assembly [D]

Reed Valve Installation


Installation is the reverse of removal.
Tighten:
Torque - Carburetor Holder Mounting Bolts: 9.4 Nm (1.0
kgfm, 83 inlb)

Reed Valve Inspection


Refer to the Reed Valve Inspection in the Periodic Main-
tenance chapter.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


3-22 FUEL SYSTEM
Fuel Hose
Fuel Hoses and Connections Inspection
Check the fuel hose periodically in accordance with the
Periodic Maintenance Chart, and if the motorcycle is not
properly handled, the inside the fuel line can cause fuel
to leak [A] or the hose to burst. Remove the fuel tank and
check the fuel hose.
Replace the fuel hose if any fraying, cracks [B] or bulges
[C] are noticed.
Check that the hoses are securely connected and clamps
are tightened correctly.
When installing, route the hoses according to Cable, Wire
and Hose Routing section in the Appendix chapter.
When installing the fuel hoses, avoid sharp bending, kink-
ing, flattening or twisting, and route the fuel hoses with a
minimum of bending so that the fuel flow will not be ob-
structed.
Replace the hose if it has been sharply bent or kinked.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


COOLING SYSTEM 4-1

Cooling System
Table of Contents
Exploded View........................................................................................................................ 4-2
Specifications ......................................................................................................................... 4-4
Coolant ................................................................................................................................... 4-5
Coolant Level Inspection................................................................................................... 4-5
Coolant Deterioration Inspection....................................................................................... 4-5
Coolant Draining ............................................................................................................... 4-5 4
Coolant Filling ................................................................................................................... 4-6
Cooling System Pressure Testing ..................................................................................... 4-7
Cooling System Flushing .................................................................................................. 4-8
Water Pump............................................................................................................................ 4-9
Water Pump Cover Removal ............................................................................................ 4-9
Water Pump Cover Installation ........................................................................................ 4-9
Impeller Removal .............................................................................................................. 4-9
Impeller Installation ........................................................................................................... 4-9
Water Pump Inspection..................................................................................................... 4-10
Water Pump Gear Removal .............................................................................................. 4-10
Water Pump Gear Installation ........................................................................................... 4-10
Oil Seal and Bearing Removal.......................................................................................... 4-10
Oil Seal and Bearing Installation....................................................................................... 4-10
Radiator .................................................................................................................................. 4-11
Radiator Removal ............................................................................................................. 4-11
Radiator Installation .......................................................................................................... 4-11
Radiator Inspection ........................................................................................................... 4-12
Radiator Cap Inspection ................................................................................................... 4-12
Filler Neck Inspection........................................................................................................ 4-13
Water Hoses and Overflow Hose Inspection .................................................................... 4-13
Water Hoses and Overflow Hose Installation ................................................................... 4-13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


4-2 COOLING SYSTEM
Exploded View

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


COOLING SYSTEM 4-3
Exploded View

Torque
No. Fastener Remarks
Nm kgfm ftlb
1 Water Hose Clamp Screws 3.0 0.31 27 inlb
2 Coolant Drain Bolt (Cylinder) 8.8 0.90 78 inlb
3 Air Bleeder Bolt 9.4 1.0 83 inlb
4 Water Pump Cover Bolts 9.4 1.0 83 inlb
5 Water Pump Impeller Bolt 8.3 0.85 73 inlb
6 Coolant Drain Bolt (Water Pump) 5.2 0.53 46 inlb
M: Apply molybdenum disulfide grease.
R: Replacement Parts

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


4-4 COOLING SYSTEM
Specifications

Item Standard
Recommended Coolant
Type Permanent type antifreeze (soft water and ethylene glycol
plus corrosion and rust inhibitor chemicals for aluminum
engines and radiators)
Color Green
Mixed Ratio Soft water 50%, coolant 50%
Freezing Point 35C (31F)
Total Amount 0.57 L (0.60 US qt)
Radiator
Radiator Cap Relief Pressure 108 137.4 kPa (1.10 1.40 kgf/cm, 15.7 19.9 psi)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


COOLING SYSTEM 4-5
Coolant
Coolant Level Inspection
Refer to the Coolant Level Inspection in the Periodic Main-
tenance chapter.
Coolant Deterioration Inspection
Refer to the Coolant Deterioration Inspection in the Peri-
odic Maintenance chapter.
Coolant Draining
WARNING
Coolant can be extremely hot and cause severe
burns, is toxic and very slippery. Do not remove
the radiator cap or attempt to change the coolant
when the engine is hot; allow it cool completely.
Immediately wipe any spilled coolant from tires,
frame, engine or other painted parts. Do not ingest
coolant.

NOTICE
The coolant should be changed periodically to en-
sure long engine life.

Remove the radiator cap [A].


NOTE
Remove the radiator cap in two steps. First turn the
cap counterclockwise to the first stop and wait there for
a few seconds. Then push down and turn it further in
the same direction and remove the cap.

Place a container under the coolant drain bolt (water


pump) [A].
Remove
coolant.
the coolant drain bolt (water pump) to drain the

Place
[A].
a container under the coolant drain bolt (cylinder)

Remove
coolant.
the coolant drain bolt (cylinder) to drain the

Inspect the old coolant (see Coolant Deterioration Inspec-


tion in the Periodic Maintenance chapter).

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


4-6 COOLING SYSTEM
Coolant
Coolant Filling
NOTICE
Use coolant containing corrosion inhibitors made
specifically for aluminum engines and radiators in
accordance with the instruction of the manufac-
tures. Soft or distilled water must be used with the
antifreeze (see below for antifreeze) in the cooling
system. If hard water is used in the system, it
causes scale accumulation in the water passages,
and considerably reduces the efficiency of the
cooling system.

Recommended Coolant
Type: Permanent type antifreeze (soft water
and ethylene glycol plus corrosion
and rust inhibitor chemicals for
aluminum engines and radiators)
Color: Green
Mixed Ratio: Soft water 50%, coolant 50%
Freezing Point: 35C (31F)
Total Amount: 0.57 L (0.60 US qt)

Replace the drain bolt gaskets with new ones.


Tighten:
Torque - Coolant Drain Bolt (Cylinder): 8.8 Nm (0.90 kgfm,
78 inlb)
Coolant Drain Bolt (Water Pump): 5.2 Nm (0.53
kgfm, 46 inlb)

Fill the radiator up to the bottom of the radiator filler neck


[A] with coolant [B].
Lean the motorcycle slightly so that the filler neck is lo-
cated uppermost in order to exhaust the air accumulated
in the radiator.
NOTE
Pour in the coolant slowly so that it can expel the air
from the engine and radiator.

Loosen the air bleeder bolt [A] on the cylinder head until
the coolant begins to flow out the air bleeder bolt hole.
Tighten:
Torque - Air Bleeder Bolt: 9.4 Nm (1.0 kgfm, 83 inlb)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


COOLING SYSTEM 4-7
Coolant

Tap the water hoses to force out any air bubbles [A]
caught inside.
Check the coolant level (see Coolant Level Inspection in
the Periodic Maintenance chapter).
If the coolant level is low, add coolant up to the bottom of
the radiator filler neck.

Install the radiator cap.


NOTE
The radiator cap must be installed in two steps. First
turn the cap clockwise to the first stop. Then push down
on it and turn it the rest of the way.

Start the engine, warm up the engine thoroughly, and then


stop the engine.
Wait until the engine cools down.
Check the coolant level (see Coolant Level Inspection in
the Periodic Maintenance chapter).
If the coolant level is low, add coolant up to the bottom of
the radiator filler neck.
Install the radiator cap.
Check the cooling system for leaks.
Cooling System Pressure Testing
NOTICE
During pressure testing, do not exceed the pres-
sure for which the system is designed to work. The
maximum pressure is 137.4 kPa (1.40 kgf/cm, 19.9
psi).

Remove the radiator cap, and install a cooling system


pressure tester [A] and adapter [B] on the radiator filler
neck [C].
NOTE
Wet the adapter cap sealing surfaces with water or
coolant to prevent pressure leaks.

Build up pressure in the system carefully until the pres-


sure reaches 137.4 kPa (1.40 kgf/cm, 19.9 psi).
Watch the gauge for at least 6 seconds.
If the pressure holds steady, the cooling system is all right.
If the pressure drops and no external source is found,
check for internal leaks. Check the cylinder head gasket
for leaks.
Remove the pressure tester, replenish the coolant, and
install the radiator cap.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


4-8 COOLING SYSTEM
Coolant
Cooling System Flushing
Over a period of time, the cooling system accumulates
rust, scale, and lime in the water jacket and radiator. When
this accumulation is suspected or observed, flush the cool-
ing system. If this accumulation is not removed, it will clog
up the water passages and considerably reduce the effi-
ciency of the cooling system.
Drain the cooling system (see Coolant Draining).
Fill the cooling system with fresh water mixed with a flush-
ing compound.
NOTICE
Avoid the use of a flushing compound which is
harmful to the aluminum engine and radiators.
Carefully follow the instructions supplied by the
manufacture of the cleaning product.

Warm up the engine, and run it at normal operating tem-


perature for about 10 minutes.
Stop the engine, and drain the cooling system after the
coolant cools down.
Fill the system with fresh water.
Warm up the engine and drain the system after the
coolant cools down.
Repeat the previous two steps once more.
the air from thewith
Fill the system a permanent type coolant, and bleed
system (see Coolant Filling).

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


COOLING SYSTEM 4-9
Water Pump
Water Pump Cover Removal
Drain the coolant (see Coolant Draining).
the waterthehoses
Loosen water hose clamp screws [A], and disconnect
[B].
cover [D].
Remove the water pump cover bolts [C] and water pump

Water Pump Cover Installation


Replace the water pump cover gasket [A] with a new one.
Install the dowel pins [B] and water pump cover.
Tighten:
Torque - Water Pump Cover Bolts: 9.4 Nm (1.0 kgfm, 83
inlb)

Install
outside.
the water hoses [A] so that the paint mark [B] faces

Tighten:
Torque - Water Hose Clamp Screws [C]: 3.0 Nm (0.31
kgfm, 27 inlb)

Impeller Removal
Remove the water pump cover (see Water Pump Cover
Removal).
Remove the impeller bolt [A] and take out the impeller [B]
and washer.

Impeller Installation
Install the washer [A] and impeller [B].
Tighten:
Torque - Water Pump Impeller Bolt: 8.3 Nm (0.85 kgfm, 73
inlb)
Install the water pump cover (see Water Pump Cover In-
stallation).

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


4-10 COOLING SYSTEM
Water Pump
Water Pump Inspection
Visually check the impeller [A].
If the surface is corroded, or if the blades [B] are dam-
aged, replace the impeller.

Water Pump Gear Removal


Remove the primary gear (see Primary Gear Removal in
the Engine Right Side chapter).
Pull out the water pump gear [A] together with the shaft.

Water Pump Gear Installation


Installation is the reverse of removal.
Oil Seal and Bearing Removal
Refer to the Right Engine Cover Disassembly in the En-
gine Right Side chapter.
Oil Seal and Bearing Installation
Refer to the Right Engine Cover Assembly in the Engine
Right Side chapter.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


COOLING SYSTEM 4-11
Radiator
Radiator Removal
Drain the coolant (see Coolant Draining).
Right Shroud (see Shroud Removal/Installation in the
Remove:

Frame chapter)

Remove the radiator screen bolt [A].


Clear the hook [B] and remove the radiator screen [C].

Disconnect the overflow hose [A].


the water hoses [C].
Loosen the water hose clamp screws [B], and disconnect

Remove:
Radiator Mounting Bolts [A]
Clutch Cable Clamp [B]
Radiator [C]

Radiator Installation
Install:
Radiator
Clutch Cable Clamp [A]
Tighten the radiator mounting bolts securely.
Run the overflow hose and water hoses correctly (see
Cable, Wire, and Hose Routing section in the Appendix
chapter).
Tighten:
Torque - Water Hose Clamp Screws: 3.0 Nm (0.31 kgfm,
27 inlb)
Install the radiator screen.
Fit the projections [B] and holes [C].
Tighten the radiator screen bolts securely.
Install the removed parts (see appropriate chapters).

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


4-12 COOLING SYSTEM
Radiator
Radiator Inspection
Check the radiator core.
If there are obstructions to air flow, remove them.
If the corrugated fins [A] are deformed, carefully
straighten them with the standard tip screwdriver.
NOTICE
Do not tear the radiator tubes while straightening
the fins.
If the air passages of the radiator core are blocked more
than 20% by unremovable obstructions or irreparably de-
formed fins, replace the radiator with a new one.

NOTICE
When cleaning the radiator with steam cleaner, be
careful of the following to prevent radiator damage.
Keep the steam gun [A] away more than 0.5 m (1.64
ft) [B] from the radiator core. Hold the steam gun
perpendicular to the core surface. Run the steam
gun following the core fin direction [C].

Radiator Cap Inspection


Check the top and bottom valve seals [A] of the radiator
cap, and the condition of the valve spring [B].
If any one of them shows visible damage, replace the cap.

Wet the top and bottom valve seals with water or coolant
to prevent pressure leaks.
Install the cap [A] on a cooling system pressure tester [B].
tester to build
Watching the pressure gauge, slowly pump the pressure
up the pressure. The gauge hand must
remain within the relief pressure range in the table below
at least 6 seconds. Continue to pump the tester until the
relief valve opens, indicated by the gauge hand flicking
downward. The relief valve must open within the specified
range.
Radiator Cap Relief Pressure
Standard: 108 137.4 kPa (1.10 1.40 kgf/cm, 15.7
19.9 psi)
If the cap cannot hold the pressure, or if the relief pressure
is too high or too low, replace the cap with a new one.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


COOLING SYSTEM 4-13
Radiator
Filler Neck Inspection
Check the radiator filler neck for signs of damage.
[A] in thethefiller
Check condition of the top and bottom sealing seats
neck. They must be smooth and clean for
the radiator cap to function properly.

Water Hoses and Overflow Hose Inspection


Refer to the Water Hoses and Connections Inspection in
the Periodic Maintenance chapter.
Water Hoses and Overflow Hose Installation
Install the water hoses or overflow hose being careful to
follow the performed bends (see Cable, Wire, and Hose
Routing section in the Appendix chapter). Avoid sharp
bending, kinking, flattening, or twisting.
Tighten:
Torque - Water Hose Clamp Screws: 3.0 Nm (0.31 kgfm,
27 inlb)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ENGINE TOP END 5-1

Engine Top End


Table of Contents
Exploded View........................................................................................................................ 5-2
Specifications ......................................................................................................................... 5-4
Special Tools .......................................................................................................................... 5-5
Cylinder Head......................................................................................................................... 5-6
Compression Pressure Measurement .............................................................................. 5-6
Cylinder Head Removal .................................................................................................... 5-6
Cylinder Head Installation ................................................................................................. 5-7
Cylinder Head Cleaning ....................................................................................................
Cylinder Head Warp Inspection ........................................................................................
5-7
5-7
5
Cylinder .................................................................................................................................. 5-8
Cylinder Removal.............................................................................................................. 5-8
Cylinder Installation........................................................................................................... 5-9
Piston Removal................................................................................................................. 5-9
Piston Installation.............................................................................................................. 5-10
Cylinder Wear Inspection.................................................................................................. 5-11
Piston Diameter Measurement ......................................................................................... 5-11
Piston/Cylinder Clearance Inspection ............................................................................... 5-11
Piston Ring/Ring Groove Clearance Inspection................................................................ 5-11
Piston Ring Groove Width Inspection ............................................................................... 5-12
Piston Ring Thickness Inspection ..................................................................................... 5-12
Piston Ring End Gap Measurement ................................................................................. 5-12
Piston, Piston Pin, and Connecting Rod Wear Inspection ................................................ 5-13
Exhaust Valve (KIPS) ............................................................................................................. 5-14
Exhaust Valve Removal ................................................................................................... 5-14
Exhaust Valve Installation ................................................................................................. 5-14
Muffler..................................................................................................................................... 5-15
Muffler Removal/Installation.............................................................................................. 5-15
Expansion Chamber Removal .......................................................................................... 5-15
Expansion Chamber Installation ....................................................................................... 5-15
Silencer Wool Change ...................................................................................................... 5-16

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


5-2 ENGINE TOP END
Exploded View

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


ENGINE TOP END 5-3
Exploded View

Torque
No. Fastener Remarks
Nm kgfm ftlb
1 Cylinder Head Nuts 25 2.5 18 S
2 Exhaust Valve Cover Screws 3.0 0.31 27 inlb
3 KIPS Cover Bolts 5.2 0.53 46 inlb
4 Exhaust Valve Lever Mounting Bolt 3.9 0.40 35 inlb L
5 Exhaust Valve Plate Bolts 5.9 0.60 52 inlb
6 Cylinder Nuts 25 2.5 18 S
7 Muffler Body Cover Bolts 8.8 0.90 78 inlb L
HG: Apply high-temperature grease.
L: Apply a non-permanent locking agent.
LG: Apply liquid gasket.
M: Apply molybdenum disulfide grease.
R: Replacement Parts
S: Follow the specified tightening sequence.
2T: Apply 2-stroke oil.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


5-4 ENGINE TOP END
Specifications

Item Standard Service Limit


Cylinder Head
Cylinder Compression (Usable range)
826 1 278 kPa (8.4 13 kgf/cm, 120
185 psi) at 5 times
Cylinder Head Warp 0.03 mm (0.001 in.)
Cylinder, Piston
Cylinder Inside Diameter:
KX85C/D 48.505 48.520 mm (1.9096 1.9102 in.) 48.60 mm (1.913 in.)
KX100F 52.515 52.530 mm (2.0675 2.0681 in.) 52.62 mm (2.072 in.)
Piston Diameter:
KX85C/D 48.444 48.459 mm (1.9072 1.9078 in.) 48.29 mm (1.901 in.)
KX100F 52.435 52.450 mm (2.0644 2.0650 in.) 52.29 mm (2.059 in.)
Piston/cylinder
Clearance:
KX85C/D 0.056 0.066 mm (0.0022 0.0026 in.)
KX100F 0.075 0.085 mm (0.0030 0.0033 in.)
Piston Ring/groove
Clearance:
KX85C/D 0.02 0.06 mm (0.0008 0.0024 in.) 0.16 mm (0.0063 in.)
KX100F 0.04 0.08 mm (0.0016 0.0031 in.) 0.18 mm (0.0071 in.)
Piston Ring Groove
Width:
KX85C/D 1.01 1.03 mm (0.0398 0.0406 in.) 1.11 mm (0.0437 in.)
KX100F 1.03 1.05 mm (0.0406 0.0413 in.) 1.13 mm (0.0445 in.)
Piston Ring Thickness 0.97 0.99 mm (0.038 0.039 in.) 0.90 mm (0.035 in.)
Piston Ring End Gap 0.30 0.50 mm (0.012 0.020 in.) 0.8 mm (0.03 in.)
Piston Pin Diameter 13.995 14.000 mm (0.55098 0.55118 in.) 13.96 mm (0.5496 in.)
Piston Pin Hole Diameter 14.001 14.011 mm (0.55122 0.55161 in.) 14.08 mm (0.5543 in.)
Connecting Rod Small
18.002 18.013 mm (0.70874 0.70917 in.) 18.05 mm (0.7106 in.)
End Inside Diameter

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


ENGINE TOP END 5-5
Special Tools
Compression Gauge, 20 kgf/cm: Compression Gauge Adapter, M14 1.25:
57001-221 57001-1159

Piston Pin Puller Assembly:


57001-910

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


5-6 ENGINE TOP END
Cylinder Head
Compression Pressure Measurement
Start the engine.
tween the piston
Thoroughly warm up the engine so that the engine oil be-
and cylinder wall will help seal compres-
sion as it does during normal running.
Stop the engine.
Remove the spark plug (see Spark Plug Replacement in
the Periodic Maintenance chapter).
Attach the compression gauge [A] and adapter [B] firmly
into the spark plug hole.
Special Tools - Compression Gauge, 20 kgf/cm: 57001-221
Compression Gauge Adapter, M14 1.25:
57001-1159

With the throttle fully open, turn the engine over sharply
with the kickstarter several times until the compression
gauge stops riding; the compression is the highest read-
ing obtainable.
Compression Pressure (Usable Range)
826 1 278 kPa (8.4 13 kgf/cm, 120 185 psi)

Install the removed parts (see appropriate chapters).


The following table should be consulted if the obtained
compression reading is not within the usable range.
Problem Diagnosis Remedy (Action)
Cylinder Carbon build up on the piston head and cylinder Remove the carbon deposits, replace damaged
compres- head, and in combustion chamber possibly due parts, and replace the engine oil with good
sion is to poor quality engine oil, damaged crankshaft one, if necessary.
higher than oil seals (This may be indicated by while
usable exhaust smoke).
range Incorrect cylinder base gasket thickness Replace the gasket with a standard part.
Cylinder Gasket leakage around cylinder head Replace gasket and check cylinder head warp.
compres- Incorrect piston/cylinder clearance Replace the piston and/or cylinder.
sion is
lower than Piston seizure Inspect the cylinder and piston as necessary.
usable Bad condition of piston ring and/or piston ring
Replace the piston and/or piston ring.
range grave
Gas leakage from the crank chamber Check the crankshaft oil seals and reed valves.

Cylinder Head Removal


Drain the coolant (see Coolant Draining in the Cooling
System chapter).
Remove:
Radiator (see Radiator Removal in the Cooling System
chapter)
Expansion Chamber (see Expansion Chamber Re-
moval)
Spark Plug Cap
Engine Bracket Bolts and Nuts [A]
Engine Brackets [B]
Cylinder Head Nuts [C]
Cylinder Head [D]
Cylinder Head Gasket

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


ENGINE TOP END 5-7
Cylinder Head
Cylinder Head Installation
Replace the cylinder head gasket with a new one.
rust and remove
Check the head water jacket for a crust of minerals and
them if necessary.
Install a new cylinder [A].
Install the dowel pins
UP [B] facing up. head gasket with the side marked
Tighten the cylinder head nuts to the specified torque in
a crisscross pattern.
Torque - Cylinder Head Nuts: 25 Nm (2.5 kgfm, 18 ftlb)
Install the removed parts (see appropriate chapters).
Cylinder Head Cleaning
Refer to the Cylinder Head Warp Inspection in the Peri-
odic Maintenance chapter.
Cylinder Head Warp Inspection
Refer to the Cylinder Head Warp Inspection in the Peri-
odic Maintenance chapter.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


5-8 ENGINE TOP END
Cylinder
Cylinder Removal
Remove the fuel tank mounting bolt [A]

Drain the coolant (see Coolant Draining in the Cooling


System chapter).
Remove the radiator (see Radiator Removal in the Cool-
ing System chapter).
Loosen the water hose clamp screws [A].
Remove:
Water Hoses [B]
Cylinder Head (see Cylinder Head Removal)
Carburetor (see Carburetor Removal in the Fuel System
chapter)

Remove:
KIPS Cover Bolts [A]
KIPS Cover [B]
KIPS Cover Gasket

Remove the circlip [A].


from the operating
Push [B] the shaft lever, and disconnect the link lever [C]
rod [D].
Pull the boot [E] down.

Open the clamp [A].


Tap lightlytheupcylinder
Remove nuts [B].
[C] from the crankcase. mallet to separate the cylinder
with a plastic

Remove the cylinder base gasket.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


ENGINE TOP END 5-9
Cylinder
Cylinder Installation
Scrape any carbon out of the exhaust port.
jacket, anda crust
Check on of minerals and rust in the cylinder water
remove them if necessary.
Replace the cylinder base gasket with a new one.
and cylinder bore.
Apply 2-stroke engine oil to the piston surface, piston ring

Check to see that the pin [A] in piston ring groove is be-
tween the ends of the piston ring, and fit the base of the
cylinder over the ring, pressing in on opposite sides of the
ring as necessary. Be certain that the ring do not slip out
of position.
Tighten the cylinder nuts to the specified torque in a criss-
cross pattern.
Torque - Cylinder Nuts: 25 Nm (2.5 kgfm, 18 ftlb)

Replace
ones.
the circlip [A] and KIPS cover gasket with new

Install the boot [B] to the cylinder.


the operating
Push [C] the shaft lever, and connect the link lever [D] to
rod [E].
Circlip
Install:

KIPS Cover Gasket


KIPS Cover
Tighten:
Torque - KIPS Cover Bolts: 5.2 Nm (0.53 kgfm, 46 inlb)
Install the removed parts (see appropriate chapters).
Piston Removal
Remove the cylinder (see Cylinder Removal).
connecting rodcloth
Stuff a clean into the crankcase opening around the
so that no parts will fall into the crankcase.
Remove
pliers.
one of the piston pin snap rings with needle nose

Remove the piston by pushing the piston pin out the side
from which the snap ring was removed. Use a piston pin
puller assembly [A], if the pin is tight.
Special Tool - Piston Pin Puller Assembly: 57001-910

Remove the piston ring.


Carefully spread the ring [A] opening with your thumbs
and then push up on the opposite side of the ring to re-
move it.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


5-10 ENGINE TOP END
Cylinder
Piston Installation
Stuff a clean cloth into the crankcase opening around the
connecting rod so that no parts will fall into the crankcase.
Scrape off any carbon of the piston, then lightly polish the
piston with fine emery cloth.
Clean carbon and dirt out of the piston ring groove using
a suitable tool.
NOTICE
Carbon particles can be very abrasive to piston
ring. Dont allow such particles to fall onto the
cylinder walls.

First fit one end of the piston ring against the pin in the
ring groove, spread the ring opening with the other hand
and then slip the ring into the groove.
Install the ring [A] so that the marked [B] side faces up-
ward.
The mark on the ring are as follows;
KX85C/D 1N
KX100F N

Install the piston ring so that the pin [A] in the piston ring
groove is between the ends of the piston ring.

Apply 2-stroke engine oil to the connecting rod needle


bearing and the piston pin.
Install the piston with its mark [A] facing forward.
Install the piston with IN mark [B] facing backward
(KX85C/D).

When installing a piston pin snap ring, compress it only


enough to install it and no more.
NOTICE
Do not reuse piston pin snap rings, as removal
weakens and deforms them. They could fall out
and score the cylinder wall.

Fit a new piston pin snap ring [A] into the side of the piston
so that the ring opening [B] does not coincide with the
notch [C] in the edge of the piston pin hole.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


ENGINE TOP END 5-11
Cylinder
Cylinder Wear Inspection
Refer to the Cylinder Wear Inspection in the Periodic
Maintenance chapter.
Piston Diameter Measurement
Measure the outside diameter of the piston 17 mm (0.67
in.) [A] up from the bottom of the piston at a right angle to
the direction of the piston pin.
If the measurement is under the service limit, replace the
piston.
Piston Diameter
Standard:
KX85C/D 48.444 48.459 mm (1.9072 1.9078 in.)
KX100F 52.435 52.450 mm (2.0644 2.0650 in.)
Service Limit:
KX85C/D 48.29 mm (1.901 in.)
KX100F 52.29 mm (2.059 in.)

Piston/Cylinder Clearance Inspection


Refer to the Piston/Cylinder Clearance in the Periodic
Maintenance chapter.
Piston Ring/Ring Groove Clearance Inspection
Check
ing.
for uneven groove wear by inspecting the ring seat-

The ring should fit perfectly parallel to the groove surface.


If not, replace the piston and piston ring.
With the piston ring in its groove, make several mea-
surements with a thickness gauge [A] to determine piston
ring/groove clearance.
Piston Ring/Ring Groove Clearance
Standard:
KX85C/D 0.02 0.06 mm (0.0008 0.0024 in.)
KX100F 0.04 0.08 mm (0.0016 0.0031 in.)
Service Limit:
KX85C/D 0.16 mm (0.0063 in.)
KX100F 0.18 mm (0.0071 in.)
If the piston ring groove clearance is greater than the ser-
vice limit, measure the ring thickness and groove width as
follows to decide whether to replace the ring, the piston
or both.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


5-12 ENGINE TOP END
Cylinder
Piston Ring Groove Width Inspection
Measure the groove width at several points around the
piston with a vernier caliper.
Piston Ring Groove Width
Standard:
KX85C/D 1.01 1.03 mm (0.0398 0.0406 in.)
KX100F 1.03 1.05 mm (0.0406 0.0413 in.)
Service Limit:
KX85C/D 1.11 mm (0.0437 in.)
KX100F 1.13 mm (0.0445 in.)
If any of the groove widths exceeds the service limit, re-
place the piston.
Piston Ring Thickness Inspection
Measure the thickness at several points around the ring
with a micrometer.
Piston Ring Thickness
Standard: 0.97 0.99 mm (0.038 0.039 in.)
Service Limit: 0.90 mm (0.035 in.)
If any of the measurements is less than the service limit,
replace the ring.

NOTE
When using new ring in a used piston, check for uneven
groove wear. The ring should fit perfectly parallel to the
groove sides. If not, replace the piston.

Piston Ring End Gap Measurement


Place the piston ring [A] inside the cylinder, using the pis-
ton to locate the ring squarely in place. Set it close to the
bottom of the cylinder, where cylinder wear is low.
Measure the gap [B] between the ends of the ring with a
thickness gauge.
Piston Ring End Gap
Standard: 0.30 0.50 mm (0.012 0.020 in.)
Service Limit: 0.8 mm (0.03 in.)
If the ring end gap exceeds the service limit, replace the
ring.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


ENGINE TOP END 5-13
Cylinder
Piston, Piston Pin, and Connecting Rod Wear
Inspection
Visually inspect the snap rings [A] still fitted in place.
If the ring shows weakness or deformation, replace the
ring. Also if the pin hole groove shows excessive wear,
replace the piston.
Measure the diameter of the piston pin [D] with a microm-
eter.
Piston Pin Diameter
Standard: 13.995 14.000 mm (0.55098 0.55118
in.)
Service Limit: 13.96 mm (0.5496 in.)
If the piston pin diameter is less than the service limit at
any point, replace the piston pin.
Using a cylinder gauge, measure the diameter of both the
piston pin holes [B] in the piston and the inside diameter
of the connecting rod small end.
Piston Pin Hole Diameter
Standard: 14.001 14.011 mm (0.55122 0.55161
in.)
Service Limit: 14.08 mm (0.5543 in.)

Connecting Rod Small End Inside Diameter


Standard: 18.002 18.013 mm (0.70874 0.70917
in.)
Service Limit: 18.05 mm (0.7106 in.)
If either piston pin hole diameter exceeds the service limit,
replace the piston.
If the inside diameter of the connecting rod small end ex-
ceeds the service limit, replace the crankshaft assembly.
Check the needle bearing [C].
The rollers in a needle bearing normally wear very little,
and wear is difficult to measure. Instead of measuring, in-
spect the bearing for abrasion, color change, other dam-
age.
If there is any doubt as to the condition of a needle bear-
ing, replace the bearing and piston pin.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


5-14 ENGINE TOP END
Exhaust Valve (KIPS)
Exhaust Valve Removal
Remove:
Cylinder (see Cylinder Removal)
Exhaust Valve Cover Screws [A]
Exhaust Valve Cover [B]
Exhaust Valve Cover Gasket

Remove:
Exhaust Valve Lever Mounting Bolt [A]
Operating Rod [B]
Exhaust Valve Lever [C]
Exhaust Valve Plate Bolts [D]
Exhaust Valve Plate [E]
Exhaust Valves [F]

Exhaust Valve Installation


Scrape out any carbon and clean the exhaust valves with
a high flash-point solvent.
Check the exhaust valves for sings of damage.
If necessary, replace them with new ones.
Apply a 2-stroke oil to the exhaust valve.
Install the exhaust valves.
Install the exhaust valve with chamfer [A] facing the en-
gine left side.
Install the exhaust valve plate.
Tighten:
Torque - Exhaust Valve Plate Bolts: 5.9 Nm (0.60 kgfm, 52
inlb)
Apply a high temperature grease to the oil seal lip on the
operating rod.
Install the operating rod with the exhaust valve lever.
haust valve
Apply a non-permanent locking agent to the thread of ex-
lever mounting bolt.
Tighten:
Torque - Exhaust Valve Lever Mounting Bolt: 3.9 Nm (0.40
kgfm, 35 inlb)

Turn the operating rod [A] to check that the slide and ex-
haust valves [B] move smoothly.
Replace the exhaust valve cover gasket with the new one.
Tighten: exhaust valve cover.
Install the

Torque - Exhaust Valve Cover Screws: 3.0 Nm (0.31 kgfm,
27 inlb)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


ENGINE TOP END 5-15
Muffler
Muffler Removal/Installation
Remove:
Left Side Cover (see Side Cover Removal/Installation in
the Frame chapter)
Bolt [A]
Bolt [B] and Washers
Remove the muffler [C] from the rubber [D].
Installation is the reverse of removal.

Expansion Chamber Removal


Remove:
Muffler (see Muffler Removal/Installation)
Left Shroud (see Shroud Removal/Installation in the
Frame chapter)
Bolt [A]
Shroud Screen [B]

Remove the expansion chamber mounting springs [A].

Remove:
Bolt [A]
Expansion Chamber [B]
Exhaust Gasket

Expansion Chamber Installation


Scrape any carbon out of the muffler.
Apply molybdenum
Replace the exhaust gasket and exhaust O-rings [A].
O-rings. disulfide grease around the exhaust

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


5-16 ENGINE TOP END
Muffler

Install
shown.
the expansion chamber mounting springs [A] as

Cylinder Side [B]


Expansion Chamber Side [C]

Silencer Wool Change


Refer to the Silencer Wool Replacement in the Periodic
Maintenance chapter.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


ENGINE RIGHT SIDE 6-1

Engine Right Side


Table of Contents
Exploded View........................................................................................................................ 6-2
Specifications ......................................................................................................................... 6-6
Special Tools .......................................................................................................................... 6-7
Clutch Lever and Cable .......................................................................................................... 6-8
Clutch Lever (Clutch Cable) Free Play Inspection ............................................................ 6-8
Clutch Lever (Clutch Cable) Free Play Adjustment .......................................................... 6-8
Clutch Lever Holder Installation ........................................................................................ 6-8
Clutch Cable Removal ...................................................................................................... 6-8
Clutch Cable Installation ................................................................................................... 6-9
Clutch Cable Inspection and Lubrication .......................................................................... 6-9
Clutch Cover and Right Engine Cover.................................................................................... 6-10
6
Clutch Cover Removal ...................................................................................................... 6-10
Clutch Cover Installation ................................................................................................... 6-10
Release Shaft Removal .................................................................................................... 6-10
Release Shaft Installation ................................................................................................. 6-10
Clutch Cover Disassembly................................................................................................ 6-11
Clutch Cover Assembly..................................................................................................... 6-11
Right Engine Cover Removal............................................................................................ 6-11
Right Engine Cover Installation......................................................................................... 6-12
Right Engine Cover Disassembly ..................................................................................... 6-13
Right Engine Cover Assembly .......................................................................................... 6-14
Advancer Disassembly ..................................................................................................... 6-16
Advancer Assembly .......................................................................................................... 6-17
Clutch ..................................................................................................................................... 6-18
Clutch Removal................................................................................................................. 6-18
Clutch Installation.............................................................................................................. 6-19
Clutch Plates Wear, Damage Inspection .......................................................................... 6-20
Clutch Plates Warp Inspection .......................................................................................... 6-20
Clutch Spring Free Length Inspection............................................................................... 6-21
Clutch Housing Finger Damage Inspection ...................................................................... 6-21
Friction Plate/Clutch Housing Clearance Inspection......................................................... 6-21
Clutch Hub Spline Damage Inspection ............................................................................. 6-21
Primary Gear .......................................................................................................................... 6-22
Primary Gear Removal ..................................................................................................... 6-22
Primary Gear Installation .................................................................................................. 6-22
Kickstarter............................................................................................................................... 6-23
Kick Pedal Removal.......................................................................................................... 6-23
Kick Pedal Installation....................................................................................................... 6-23
Kick Pedal Disassembly.................................................................................................... 6-23
Kick Pedal Assembly ........................................................................................................ 6-23
Kick Shaft Removal........................................................................................................... 6-23
Kick Shaft Installation........................................................................................................ 6-24
Kick Shaft Assembly Disassembly/Assembly ................................................................... 6-25

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6-2 ENGINE RIGHT SIDE
Exploded View

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


ENGINE RIGHT SIDE 6-3
Exploded View

Torque
No. Fastener Remarks
Nm kgfm ftlb
1 Clutch Cover Bolts 9.4 1.0 83 inlb
2 Clutch Spring Bolts 9.3 0.95 82 inlb
3 Clutch Hub Nut 88 9.0 65 R
CL: Apply cable lubricant.
EO: Apply engine oil.
G: Apply grease.
M: Apply molybdenum disulfide grease.
MO: Apply molybdenum disulfide oil solution.
(mixture of the engine oil and molybdenum disulfide grease in a weight ratio 10:1)
R: Replacement Parts

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6-4 ENGINE RIGHT SIDE
Exploded View

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


ENGINE RIGHT SIDE 6-5
Exploded View

Torque
No. Fastener Remarks
Nm kgfm ftlb
1 Lever Shaft Assembly Mounting Screw 6.4 0.65 57 inlb L
2 Kick Pedal Bolt 9.4 1.0 83 inlb
3 Lever Shaft Retaining Bolt 5.2 0.53 46 inlb
Hand
4 Oil Filler Cap
-tighten
5 Right Engine Cover Bolts 9.4 1.0 83 inlb
6 Kick Ratchet Guide Bolt 9.4 1.0 83 inlb
7 Kick Ratchet Guide Screw 5.2 0.53 46 inlb
8 Primary Gear Nut 49 5.0 36 Lh
EO: Apply engine oil.
G: Apply grease.
L: Apply a non-permanent locking agent.
Lh: Left-hand Threads
M: Apply molybdenum disulfide grease.
R: Replacement Parts

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6-6 ENGINE RIGHT SIDE
Specifications

Item Standard Service Limit


Clutch Lever
Clutch Lever Free Play 8 13 mm (0.3 0.5 in.)
Clutch
Friction Plate Thickness 2.92 3.08 mm (0.115 0.121 in.) 2.8 mm (0.11 in.)
Friction Plate Warp 0.15 mm (0.0059 in.) or less 0.3 mm (0.01 in.)
Steel Plate Warp 0.15 mm (0.0059 in.) or less 0.3 mm (0.01 in.)
Clutch Spring Free Length 35.0 mm (1.38 in.) 34.0 mm (1.34 in.)
Friction Plate/Clutch Housing 0.05 0.55 mm (0.002 0.022 in.) 0.6 mm (0.02 in.)
Clearance

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


ENGINE RIGHT SIDE 6-7
Special Tools
Outside Circlip Pliers: Bearing Puller Adapter:
57001-144 57001-1526

Bearing Puller: Gear Holder:


57001-158 57001-1602

Bearing Driver Set: Flywheel & Pulley Holder:


57001-1129 57001-1605

Clutch Holder:
57001-1243

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6-8 ENGINE RIGHT SIDE
Clutch Lever and Cable
Due to friction plate wear and clutch cable stretch over
a long period of use, the clutch must be adjusted in accor-
dance with the Periodic Maintenance Chart.
WARNING
The engine and exhaust system get extremely hot
during normal operation and can cause serious
burns. Never touch the engine or exhaust pipe
during clutch adjustment.

Clutch Lever (Clutch Cable) Free Play Inspection


Refer to the Clutch Operation Inspection in the Periodic
Maintenance chapter.
Clutch Lever (Clutch Cable) Free Play Adjustment
Refer to the Clutch Operation Inspection in the Periodic
Maintenance chapter.
Clutch Lever Holder Installation
Install the clutch lever holder so that the mating surface
[A] of the clutch lever holder is aligned with the punch
mark [B] of the handlebar.

Clutch Cable Removal


Remove:
Number Plate (see Number Plate Removal in the Frame
chapter)
Right Shroud (see Shroud Removal/Installation in the
Frame chapter)

Slide the dust cover [A] out of place.


Align thetheslitslocknut
Loosen [B].
Free the clutch cable upper
[C] of the adjuster, locknut and clutch lever.
end from the clutch lever.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


ENGINE RIGHT SIDE 6-9
Clutch Lever and Cable

Take the clutch cable off the cable holder [A].


lever [C].clutch cable lower end [B] off the clutch release
Take the

NOTICE
Do not remove the clutch release shaft unless it is
absolutely necessary. If removed, release shaft oil
seal must be replaced with a new one.

Remove the clutch cable.


Clutch Cable Installation
Run the clutch cable correctly (see Cable, Wire, and Hose
Routing section in the Appendix chapter).
Adjust the clutch cable (see Clutch Operation Inspection
in the Periodic Maintenance chapter).
Install the removed parts (see appropriate chapters).
Clutch Cable Inspection and Lubrication
During a periodic inspection or when the cable has been
removed, inspect and lubricate the cable (see General
Lubrication and Cable Inspection section in the Periodic
Maintenance chapter).

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6-10 ENGINE RIGHT SIDE
Clutch Cover and Right Engine Cover
Clutch Cover Removal
Drain the transmission oil (see Transmission Oil Change
in the Periodic Maintenance chapter).
Remove:
Clutch Cable Lower End [A] (see Clutch Cable Removal)
Clutch Cover Bolts [B]
Turn the release lever counterclockwise, and remove the
clutch cover [C].

Clutch Cover Installation


Replace the clutch cover gasket [A] with a new one.
Turn the release
Install the dowel pins [B] and clutch cover.
lever clockwise so that the push rod fit
into the release lever shaft.
Tighten:
Torque - Clutch Cover Bolts: 9.4 Nm (1.0 kgfm, 83 inlb)

Release Shaft Removal


NOTICE
Do not remove the clutch release lever and shaft
assembly unless it is absolutely necessary. If re-
moved, the oil seal replacement may be required.

Remove the clutch cover (see Clutch Cover Removal).


Pull the release shaft [A] straight out of the clutch cover.

Release Shaft Installation


Apply grease to the oil seal lips on the upper ridge of the
clutch cover.
Apply engine oil to the needle bearings in the hole of the
clutch cover.
Insert the release shaft straight into the upper hole of the
clutch cover.
NOTICE
When inserting the release shaft, be careful not to
remove the spring of the oil seal.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


ENGINE RIGHT SIDE 6-11
Clutch Cover and Right Engine Cover
Clutch Cover Disassembly
Remove:
Clutch Cover (see Clutch Cover Removal)
Release Shaft (see Release Shaft Removal)
Oil Seal [A]

Remove the needle bearings [A].

Clutch Cover Assembly


Replace the needle bearings and oil seal with new ones.
Install
shown.
the needle bearings [A] and oil seal [B] position as

Press the needle bearings, until the bottom.


Press the oil seal so that the oil seal surface [C] is flush
with the surface of the clutch cover.
Apply grease to the oil seal lips.

Right Engine Cover Removal


Drain:
Transmission Oil (see Transmission Oil Change in the
Periodic Maintenance chapter)
Coolant (see Coolant Draining in the Cooling System
chapter)

Remove:
Kick Pedal (see Kick Pedal Removal)
Brake Pedal Bolt [A]
Brake Pedal Return Spring [B]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6-12 ENGINE RIGHT SIDE
Clutch Cover and Right Engine Cover

Remove:
KIPS Cover Bolts [A]
KIPS Cover [B]
KIPS Cover Gasket

Remove the circlip [A].


from the operating
Push [B] the shaft lever, and disconnect the link lever [C]
rod [D].

Remove:
Impeller (see Impeller Removal in the Cooling System
chapter)
Right Engine Cover Bolts [A]
Right Engine Cover [B]

Right Engine Cover Installation


Replace the right engine cover gasket [A] with a new one.
Install the dowel pins [B].
Wrap the spline [C] of the kick shaft with the vinyl tape to
prevent damage.
Apply grease to the kick shaft oil seal lip.
shaft oilmolybdenum
Apply
seal lip.
disulfide grease to the water pump

Install the right engine cover.


L = 25 mm (0.98 in.) [A]
Tighten:

L = 30 mm (1.18 in.) [B]


Torque - Right Engine Cover Bolts: 9.4 Nm (1.0 kgfm, 83
inlb)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


ENGINE RIGHT SIDE 6-13
Clutch Cover and Right Engine Cover

Replace
ones.
the circlip [A] and KIPS cover gasket with new

Install the boot [B] to the cylinder.


the operating
Push [C] the shaft lever, and connect the link lever [D] to
rod [E].
Circlip
Install:

KIPS Cover Gasket


KIPS Cover
Tighten:
Torque - KIPS Cover Bolts: 5.2 Nm (0.53 kgfm, 46 inlb)

Remove the vinyl tape from the kick shaft.


Install the removed parts (see appropriate chapters).
Right Engine Cover Disassembly
Remove
Removal).
the right engine cover (see Right Engine Cover

Slide the boot [A] out of place.


Lever Shaft Retaining Bolt [B]
Remove:

Washer
Lever Shaft [C]
Advancer Assembly

When disassembly the lever shaft as follows.


Boot [A]
Remove:

Lever Shaft Assembly Mounting Screw [B]


Washer [C]
Lever Assy [D]
Collar [E]
Spring [F]
Lever Shaft [G]

Remove:
Oil Level Inspection Window [A]
Oil Seal [B]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6-14 ENGINE RIGHT SIDE
Clutch Cover and Right Engine Cover

Remove:
Oil Filler Cap [A]
Oil Seals [B]

Remove the bearings [A].

Right Engine Cover Assembly


Replace the oil seals and bearings with new ones.
Press the oil level inspection window [A] to the right cover
until it is bottomed.
Special Tool - Bearing Driver Set: 57001-1129
Press the oil seals [B] [C] to the right engine cover so that
the surface of the oil seals is flush with the surface of the
right engine cover.
Special Tool - Bearing Driver Set: 57001-1129
Press the oil seal [C] so that its marked side faces to bear-
ing.
Press the bearings [D] to the right engine cover until it is
bottomed.
Special Tool - Bearing Driver Set: 57001-1129
Apply engine oil to the bearings [D].

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


ENGINE RIGHT SIDE 6-15
Clutch Cover and Right Engine Cover

Apply grease to the oil seal [B] lips.


Apply molybdenum disulfide grease to the oil seal [C] lips.

When assembly the lever shaft as follows.


shaft. spring lower end [A] to the groove [B] of the lever
Fit the

Install the spring so that the bend side faces downward.


Install
ward.
the collar [C] so that the projection side faces up-

Insert the projection [D] on the lever assy [E] to between


the spring ends.
Install
ward.
the washer [F] so that the chamfer side faces up-

Apply a non-permanent locking agent to the thread of


lever shaft assembly mounting screw [G].
Tighten:
Torque - Lever Shaft Assembly Mounting Screw: 6.4 Nm
(0.65 kgfm, 57 inlb)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6-16 ENGINE RIGHT SIDE
Clutch Cover and Right Engine Cover

Fit the advancer [A] to the lever shaft [B] as shown.

Align [A] the mark [B] on the lever shaft with the mark
[C] on the right engine cover and insert the shaft into the
cover.
Tighten:
Torque - Lever Shaft Retaining Bolt [D]: 5.2 Nm (0.53
kgfm, 46 inlb)
Install the advancer in the right engine cover.

Advancer Disassembly
Hold the bearing puller [A] in a vise, and set the advancer
assembly [B] with the gear upward on the bearing puller.
Screw the rod [C] in and pull out the gear on the shaft. Do
not drop the assembly parts on the floor.
Special Tools - Bearing Puller: 57001-158
Bearing Puller Adaper: 57001-1526 [D]

The advancer assembly consists of the following parts.


Gear [A]
Spring [B]
Collar [C]
Circlip [D]
Ball Bearing [E]
Collar [F]
Holder [G]
Shaft [H]
Ball [I]
Guide [J]
Check the advancer assembly parts for damage.
Any damaged parts should be replaced with new ones.
When assembling, apply molybdenum disulfide grease
between the shaft and inside/outside diameter parts of the
holder, ball bearing and collars.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


ENGINE RIGHT SIDE 6-17
Clutch Cover and Right Engine Cover
Advancer Assembly
Press the gear [A] on the shaft so that the gear contacts
the step on the shaft.
Install the parts in due order and press fit the guide [B] to
set the distance [C] of 44.65 44.75 mm (1.7579 1.7618
in.).

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6-18 ENGINE RIGHT SIDE
Clutch
Clutch Removal
Drain the transmission oil (see Transmission Oil Change
in the Periodic Maintenance chapter).

Remove:
Magneto Cover (see Magneto Cover Removal in the
Electrical System chapter)
Clutch Cover (see Clutch Cover Removal)
Holding the flywheel [A] with the flywheel & pulley holder
[B].
Special Tool - Flywheel & Pulley Holder: 57001-1605

Remove:
Clutch Spring Bolts [A]
Clutch Springs
Clutch Pressure Plate [B]

Remove:
Push Rod [A]
Washer(s) [B] (If provided)
Friction Plates [C]
Steel Plates [D]

Hold the clutch hub [A] with the clutch holder [B].
Special Tool - Clutch Holder: 57001-1243
Remove:
Clutch Hub Nut [C]
Toothed Washer [D]
Clutch Hub
Thrust Washer
Clutch Housing [E]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


ENGINE RIGHT SIDE 6-19
Clutch

Remove:
Needle Bearings [A]
Sleeve [B]
Thrust Washer [C]

Clutch Installation
Install the thrust washer.
Apply molybdenum disulfide oil solution to the inside of
the sleeve.
Apply engine oil to the needle bearings.
Sleeve
Install:

Needle Bearings
Clutch Housing
Thrust Washer [A]
Clutch Hub [B]

Hold the clutch hub with the clutch holder [A].


Special Tool - Clutch Holder: 57001-1243
Install the toothed washer [B].
Replace the clutch hub nut [C] with a new one.
Turn the large chamfering side of the clutch hub nut to
outside.
Tighten:
Torque - Clutch Hub Nut: 88 Nm (9.0 kgfm, 65 ftlb)

Install the friction plates and steel plates alternately.


Install the friction plate first.
NOTICE
If new dry steel plates and friction plates are in-
stalled, apply engine oil to the surfaces of each
plate to avoid clutch plate seizure.

Apply molybdenum disulfide grease to the swollen areas


[A] of the push rod.
Install:
Push Rod
Washer(s) [B] (If provided)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6-20 ENGINE RIGHT SIDE
Clutch

Install the clutch pressure plate and clutch springs.


Holding
[B].
the flywheel [A] with the flywheel & pulley holder

Special Tool - Flywheel & Pulley Holder: 57001-1605


Tighten:
Torque - Clutch Spring Bolts: 9.3 Nm (0.95 kgfm, 82 inlb)
Install:
Clutch Cover (see Clutch Cover Installation)
Magneto Cover (see Magneto Cover Installation in the
Electrical System chapter)

Turn the clutch release lever toward the front until it be-
comes hard to turn, this is the point where the clutch is just
starting to release. At this time, check that the included
angle [A] between the clutch release lever [B] and the line
[C] at right angle to the right engine cover.
Clutch Release Lever Angle
Standard: Approx. 14

If it is not, adjust the clutch lever angle by increasing or


decreasing the number of washer(s) [A].
NOTE
Do not use three or more washers. If the clutch requires
an excess washer, disassemble the clutch to find the
cause.

Clutch Plates Wear, Damage Inspection


Refer to the Clutch Plates Inspection in the Periodic Main-
tenance chapter.
Clutch Plates Warp Inspection
Refer to the Clutch Plates Inspection in the Periodic Main-
tenance chapter.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


ENGINE RIGHT SIDE 6-21
Clutch
Clutch Spring Free Length Inspection
Measure the free length of the clutch springs [A].
If any clutch spring is shorter than the service limit, it must
be replaced.
Clutch Spring Free Length
Standard: 35.0 mm (1.38 in.)
Service Limit: 34.0 mm (1.34 in.)

Clutch Housing Finger Damage Inspection


Visually inspect the clutch housing fingers [A] that come
in contact with the friction plate tangs.
If they are damaged or if there are groove cuts in the areas
that come in contact with the tangs, replace the housing.
Replace the friction plates if their tangs are damaged as
well.

Friction Plate/Clutch Housing Clearance


Inspection
Measure the clearance between the tangs [A] on the fric-
tion plate and the fingers [B] of the clutch housing.
If this clearance is excessive, the clutch will be noisy.
If the clearance exceeds the service limit, replace the fric-
tion plates.
Friction Plate/Clutch Housing Clearance
Standard: 0.05 0.55 mm (0.002 0.022 in.)
Service Limit: 0.6 mm (0.02 in.)

Clutch Hub Spline Damage Inspection


Visually inspect the areas of the clutch hub splines [A] that
come in contact with the teeth of the steel plates.
If there are notches worn into the clutch hub splines, re-
place the clutch hub. Replace the steel plates if their teeth
are damaged as well.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6-22 ENGINE RIGHT SIDE
Primary Gear
Primary Gear Removal
Remove:
Right Engine Cover (see Right Engine Cover Removal)
Clutch (see Clutch Removal)
Temporarily install the clutch housing [A].
Using the gear holder [B], secure the primary gear [C].
Special Tool - Gear Holder: 57001-1602
Remove:
Primary Gear Nut [D]
Washer
Gear Holder
Clutch Housing
Primary Gear
Primary gear nut is left-hand threads.
Primary Gear Installation
Install
outside.
the primary gear so that the chamfer side faces

Temporally install the clutch housing.


faces inside. washer [A] so that the concave side
Install the spring

Temporally tighten the primary gear nut [B].


Primary gear nut is left-hand threads.

Using the gear holder [A], secure the primary gear [B].
Primary the
Tighten primary gear nut [C].
gear nut is left-hand threads.
Torque - Primary Gear Nut: 49 Nm (5.0 kgfm, 36 ftlb)
Special Tool - Gear Holder: 57001-1602
Install the removed parts (see appropriate chapters).

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


ENGINE RIGHT SIDE 6-23
Kickstarter
Kick Pedal Removal
Remove:
Kick Pedal Bolt [A]
Kick Pedal Assy [B]

Kick Pedal Installation


Install the kick pedal assy.
Put the pedal end [A] near the S mark [B].
Tighten:
Torque - Kick Pedal Bolt: 9.4 Nm (1.0 kgfm, 83 ftlb)

Kick Pedal Disassembly


Remove the kick pedal assy (see Kick Pedal Removal).
Plug Screw [A]
Remove:

Spring [B]
Steel Ball [C]
Detent Screw [D]
Boss [E]
Oil Seal [F]

Kick Pedal Assembly


Replace the oil seal [A] and plug screw [B] with a new one.
sliding portiontoofthe
Apply grease steel ball, oil seal lip, spring, and the
the pedal.
Install:
Oil Seal
Boss [C]
Detent Screw [D]
Steel Ball [E]
Spring [F]
Plug Screw
Tighten the detent screw and plug screw.
After tightening the plug screw, stake it with a punch.
Kick Shaft Removal
Remove:
Right Engine Cover (see Right Engine Cover Removal)
Clutch (see Clutch Removal)
Pull the spring end [A] out of the hole.
Kick Ratchet Guide Bolt [B]
Remove

Kick Ratchet Guide Screw [C]


Kick Ratchet Guide [D]
Kickstarter Assembly [E]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6-24 ENGINE RIGHT SIDE
Kickstarter

When removing the kickstarter idle gear [A], remove the


circlip [B].
Special Tool - Outside Circlip Pliers: 57001-144

Kick Shaft Installation


Apply molybdenum disulfide grease [A] to the kick shaft.

Insert the kick shaft assembly [A] into the crankcase.


kick shaft.
Install the kick ratchet guide [B] away as possible from the

Torque - Kick Ratchet Guide Screw [C]: 5.2 Nm (0.53 kgfm,


46 ftlb)
Kick Ratchet Guide Bolt [D]: 9.4 Nm (1.0 kgfm, 83
ftlb)
Insert the spring end into the hole [E].
When installing the kickstarter idle gear [A] as follows.
Replace the circlip [B] with a new one.
starter idle gear. disulfide grease [C] inside of the kick-
Apply molybdenum

Install the kickstarter idle gear as shown.


Install the circlip.
Special Tool - Outside Circlip Pliers: 57001-144

Install the removed parts (see appropriate chapters).

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


ENGINE RIGHT SIDE 6-25
Kickstarter
Kick Shaft Assembly Disassembly/Assembly
The kick shaft assembly consists of the following parts.
Circlips [A]
Washer [B]
Spring [C]
Ratchet Gear [D]
Kick Gear [E]
Kick Shaft [F]
Kick Spring [G]
Spring Guide [H]
Check the kick shaft assembly parts for damage. Any
damaged parts should be replaced with new ones.

NOTE
When assembling the ratchet gear onto the kick shaft,
align the notch [C] on the ratchet gear [A] with the hole
[D] on the kick shaft [B].

Apply molybdenum disulfide grease [A] to the kick gear


and kick shaft.
Replace the circlips that were removed with new ones.
Special Tool - Outside Circlip Pliers: 57001-144

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ENGINE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION 7-1

Engine Removal/Installation
Table of Contents
Exploded View........................................................................................................................ 7-2
Special Tools .......................................................................................................................... 7-4
Engine Removal/Installation ................................................................................................... 7-5
Engine Removal................................................................................................................ 7-5
Engine Installation............................................................................................................. 7-6

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


7-2 ENGINE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Exploded View

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


ENGINE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION 7-3
Exploded View

Torque
No. Fastener Remarks
Nm kgfm ftlb
1 Engine Bracket Mounting Nuts 29 3.0 21 R
2 Engine Mounting Nuts 29 3.0 21 R
3 Swingarm Pivot Shaft Nut 69 7.0 51 R
R: Replacement Parts

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


7-4 ENGINE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Special Tools
Jack: Jack Attachment:
57001-1238 57001-1608

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


ENGINE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION 7-5
Engine Removal/Installation
Engine Removal
Place the jack under the frame to support the motorcycle.
Special Tools - Jack: 57001-1238
Jack Attachment: 57001-1608

WARNING
When the swingarm pivot shaft is removed the
swingarm and rear wheel assembly will become
detached and allow the frame to fall to the floor,
creating the potential for injury. Removing the
engine requires the swingarm pivot to be removed,
so support the bottom of the frame with a jack or
other appropriate stand.

Squeeze
[A].
the brake lever slowly and hold it with a band

WARNING
Motorcycle may fall over unexpectedly resulting in
an accident or injury. Be sure to hold the front brake
when removing the engine.

NOTICE
Be sure to hold the front brake when removing the
engine, or the motorcycle may fall over. The engine
or the motorcycle could be damaged.

Drain:
Transmission Oil (see Transmission Oil Change in the
Periodic Maintenance chapter)
Coolant (see Coolant Draining in the Cooling System
chapter)

Remove:
Seat (see Seat Removal in the Frame chapter)
Exhaust Pipe (see Exhaust Pipe Removal in the Engine
Top End chapter)
Fuel Tank (see Fuel Tank Removal in the Fuel System
chapter)
Radiators and Water Hoses (see Radiator Removal in
the Cooling System chapter)
Carburetor (see Carburetor Removal in the Fuel System
chapter)
Shift Pedal (see Shift Pedal Removal in the Engine Bot-
tom End/Transmission chapter)
Engine Sprocket (see Engine Sprocket Removal in the
Final Drive chapter)
Kick Pedal (see Kick Pedal Removal in the Engine Right
Side chapter)
Clutch Cable Lower End (see Clutch Cable Removal in
the Engine Right Side chapter)
Brake Pedal Bolt and Return Spring (see Brake Pedal
Removal in the Brakes chapter)
Spark Plug Cap

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


7-6 ENGINE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Engine Removal/Installation

Remove the bolt [A] to disconnect the ground terminal.

Remove the bands [A].


Ignition Coil Primary Lead Connector [B]
Disconnect:

Crankshaft Sensor Lead Connector [C]


CDI Unit Lead Connector [D]

Remove:
Engine Bracket Mounting Nuts [A] and Bolts
Engine Mounting Nuts [B] and Bolts
Engine Bracket [C] (Both Sides)
Swingarm Pivot Shaft Nut [D]
Swingarm Pivot Shaft

Remove the engine from the motorcycle to right side.


Clear the engine rear portion from the swingarm and then
remove the engine.
Engine Installation
Replace the following parts with new ones:
Engine Bracket Mounting Nuts
Engine Mounting Nuts
Swingarm Pivot Shaft Nut
Install the engine.
First, insert the front portion of the engine from the right
side, and then install the rear portion.
Second, fit the rear portion of the engine to the swingarm.
Insert the swingarm pivot shaft from the left side.
Insert the
Install the engine brackets, bolts and nuts temporarily.
all bolts from left side.
Tighten:
Torque - Swingarm Pivot Shaft Nut [A]: 69 Nm (7.0 kgfm,
51 ftlb)
Engine Bracket Mounting Nuts [B]: 29 Nm (3.0
kgfm, 21 ftlb)
Engine Mounting Nuts [C]: 29 Nm (3.0 kgfm, 21
ftlb)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


ENGINE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION 7-7
Engine Removal/Installation

Install the removed parts (see appropriate chapters).


Wire, andcables,
Run the hoses, and leads according to the Cable,
Hose Routing section in the Appendix chapter.
Pour:
Transmission Oil (see Transmission Oil Change in the
Periodic Maintenance chapter)
Coolant (see Coolant Filling in the Cooling System chap-
ter)
Adjust:
Throttle Cable (see Throttle Grip Free Play Adjustment
in the Periodic Maintenance chapter)
Clutch Cable (see Clutch Operation Inspection in the Pe-
riodic Maintenance chapter)
Drive Chain (see Drive Chain Slack Adjustment in the
Periodic Maintenance chapter)
Idle Speed (see Idle Speed Adjustment in the Periodic
Maintenance chapter)
Check the brake effectiveness.
WARNING
After servicing, it takes several applications of the
brake lever before the brake pads contact the disc,
which could result in increased stopping distance
and cause an accident resulting in injury or death.
Do not attempt to ride the motorcycle until a firm
brake lever is obtained by pumping the lever until
the pads are against the disc.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ENGINE BOTTOM END/TRANSMISSION 8-1

Engine Bottom End/Transmission


Table of Contents
Exploded View........................................................................................................................ 8-2
Specifications ......................................................................................................................... 8-6
Special Tools and Sealant ...................................................................................................... 8-7
Transmission Oil ..................................................................................................................... 8-8
Oil Level Inspection........................................................................................................... 8-8
Transmission Oil Change.................................................................................................. 8-8
Crankcase .............................................................................................................................. 8-9
Crankcase Disassembly ................................................................................................... 8-9
Crankcase Assembly ........................................................................................................ 8-10
Crankshaft .............................................................................................................................. 8-15
Crankshaft Removal ......................................................................................................... 8-15
Crankshaft Installation ...................................................................................................... 8-15
Crankshaft Disassembly ................................................................................................... 8-15
Crankshaft Assembly ........................................................................................................ 8-15
Crankshaft Inspection ....................................................................................................... 8-16 8
Connecting Rod Bend Inspection ..................................................................................... 8-17
Connecting Rod Twist Inspection...................................................................................... 8-18
Transmission .......................................................................................................................... 8-19
Transmission Shaft Removal ............................................................................................ 8-19
Transmission Shaft Installation ......................................................................................... 8-19
Transmission Shaft Disassembly ...................................................................................... 8-20
Transmission Shaft Assembly........................................................................................... 8-20
Shift Fork Bending Inspection ........................................................................................... 8-21
Shift Fork/Gear Groove Wear Inspection.......................................................................... 8-22
Shift Fork Guide Pin/Shift Drum Groove Wear Inspection ................................................ 8-22
Gear Damage Inspection .................................................................................................. 8-22
External Shift Mechanism....................................................................................................... 8-23
Shift Pedal Removal ......................................................................................................... 8-23
Shift Pedal Installation ...................................................................................................... 8-23
External Shift Mechanism Removal .................................................................................. 8-23
External Shift Mechanism Installation ............................................................................... 8-23
External Shift Mechanism Inspection................................................................................ 8-24
Bearings/Oil Seals .................................................................................................................. 8-25
Bearing Replacement ....................................................................................................... 8-25
Bearing Wear Inspection................................................................................................... 8-25
Oil Seal Inspection ............................................................................................................ 8-26

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


8-2 ENGINE BOTTOM END/TRANSMISSION
Exploded View

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


ENGINE BOTTOM END/TRANSMISSION 8-3
Exploded View

Torque
No. Fastener Remarks
Nm kgfm ftlb
1 Drive Shaft Bearing Retainer Bolts 9.4 1.0 83 inlb
2 Shift Drum Bearing Retainer Bolts 9.4 1.0 83 inlb
3 Transmission Oil Drain Bolt 20 2.0 15
4 Crankshaft Cover Bolts 9.8 1.0 87 inlb L
5 Crankcase Bolts 9.4 1.0 83 inlb S
6 Output Shaft Bearing Retainer Screws 5.2 0.53 46 inlb L
G: Apply grease.
L: Apply a non-permanent locking agent.
LG: Apply liquid gasket.
R: Replacement Parts
S: Follow the specified tightening sequence.
2T: Apply 2-stroke oil

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


8-4 ENGINE BOTTOM END/TRANSMISSION
Exploded View

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


ENGINE BOTTOM END/TRANSMISSION 8-5
Exploded View

Torque
No. Fastener Remarks
Nm kgfm ftlb
1 Shift Drum Cam Bolt 23 2.3 17
2 Gear Positioning Lever Bolt 9.4 1.0 78 inlb
3 Shift Shaft Return Spring Pin 22 2.2 16 L
4 Shift Pedal Bolt 9.8 1.0 87 inlb
EO: Apply engine oil.
G: Apply grease.
L: Apply a non-permanent locking agent.
R: Replacement Parts

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


8-6 ENGINE BOTTOM END/TRANSMISSION
Specifications

Item Standard Service Limit


Transmission Oil
Type API SG, SH, SJ, SL or SM with JASO

MA, MA1 or MA2
Viscosity SAE10W-40
Amount 0.7 L (0.2 US qt)
Oil Level In middle of oil level inspection window
Crankshaft, Connecting Rod
Connecting Rod Big End:
Radial Clearance 0.029 0.041 mm 0.09 mm (0.004 in.)
(0.0011 0.0016 in.)
Side Clearance 0.40 0.50 mm (0.016 0.020 in.) 0.7 mm (0.03 in.)
Crankshaft Runout TIR 0.03 mm (0.001 in.) or less TIR 0.08 mm (0.003 in.)
Connecting Rod Bend TIR 0.2/100 mm
(0.008/3.94 in.)
Connecting Rod Twist TIR 0.2/100 mm
(0.008/3.94 in.)
Transmission
Shift Fork Ear Thickness 3.9 4.0 mm (0.15 0.16 in.) 3.8 mm (0.15 in.)
Gear Groove Width 4.05 4.15 mm (0.159 0.163 in.) 4.3 mm (0.17 in.)
Shift Fork Guide Pin Diameter 5.9 6.0 mm (0.23 0.24 in.) 5.8 mm (0.23 in.)
Shift Drum Groove Width 6.05 6.20 mm (0.238 0.244 in.) 6.3 mm (0.25 in.)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


ENGINE BOTTOM END/TRANSMISSION 8-7
Special Tools and Sealant
Bearing Puller: Bearing Driver Set:
57001-135 57001-1129

Bearing Puller Adapter: Crankshaft Jig:


57001-136 57001-1174

Outside Circlip Pliers: Liquid Gasket, TB1215:


57001-144 92104-1065

Crankcase Splitting Tool Assembly:


57001-1098

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


8-8 ENGINE BOTTOM END/TRANSMISSION
Transmission Oil
In order for the transmission and clutch to function prop-
erly, always maintain the transmission oil at the proper level
and change the oil periodically.
WARNING
Vehicle operation with insufficient, deteriorated, or
contaminated transmission oil will cause acceler-
ated wear and may result in engine or transmission
seizure, accident, and injury. Check the oil level be-
fore each use and change the oil and filter accord-
ing to the periodic maintenance chart.

Oil Level Inspection


Situate
ground.
the motorcycle so that it is perpendicular to the

Ifuntil
the motorcycle has just been used, wait several minutes
the oil settles.
oil levelthat
Check the oil level comes up in the middle [A] of the
inspection window [B] on the right engine cover.
If the oil level is too high, remove the excess oil through
the oil filler opening [C] using a syringe or some other
suitable device.
If the oil level is too low, add the correct amount of oil.
Use the same type and make of oil that is already in the
engine.

NOTE
If the transmission oil type and make are unknown, use
any brand of the specified oil to top up the level in pref-
erence to running the engine with the oil level low. Then
at your earliest convenience, change the oil completely.

Transmission Oil Change


Refer to the Transmission Oil Change in the Periodic
Maintenance chapter.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


ENGINE BOTTOM END/TRANSMISSION 8-9
Crankcase
Crankcase Disassembly
Remove the engine from the frame (see Engine Removal
in the Engine Removal/Installation chapter).
Set the engine on clean surface while parts are being re-
moved.
Remove:
Piston (see Piston Removal in the Engine Top End chap-
ter)
Right Engine Cover (see Right Engine Cover Removal
in the Engine Right Side chapter)
Clutch (see Clutch Removal in the Engine Right Side
chapter)
Primary Gear (see Primary Gear Removal in the Engine
Right Side chapter)
Kick Shaft (see Kick Shaft Removal in the Engine Right
Side chapter)
External Shift Mechanism (see External Shift Mecha-
nism Removal)
Flywheel (see Flywheel Removal in the Electrical Sys-
tem chapter)

Remove the output shaft collar [A] and O-rings [B].

Remove:
Crankcase Bolts [A]
Clamp [B]

Position the connecting rod in BDC.


wheels. crankshaft jig [A] between the crankshaft fly-
Install the

Special Tool - Crankshaft Jig: 57001-1174

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


8-10 ENGINE BOTTOM END/TRANSMISSION
Crankcase

Attach the
crankcase.
crankcase splitting tool [A] to the left

Use the bearing puller adapter [B] of the crankcase split-


ting tool attached.
Special Tool - Crankcase Splitting Tool Assembly: 57001
-1098
Bearing Puller Adapter: 57001-136
Tighten the center bolt to split the crankcase halves.
The front and rear portion of the crankcase must be pulled
apart evenly.

Remove:
Shift Rods [A]
Shift Forks [B]
Shift Drum [C] (see Transmission Shaft Removal)
Transmission Shafts [D] (see Transmission Shaft Re-
moval)
Crankshaft [E] (see Crankshaft Removal)
NOTICE
Do not remove the bearings and the oil seals unless
it is necessary. Removal may damage them.

Remove the breather


crankcase half.
hose assy [A] from the left

Crankcase Assembly
NOTICE
Right and left crankcase halves are machined at the
factory in the assembled state, so if replaced, they
must be replaced as a set.

Remove the old gasket from the mating surfaces of the


crankcase halves and clean them off with a high flash
-point solvent.
WARNING
Gasoline and low flash-point solvents can be
flammable and/or explosive and cause severe
burns. Clean the engine parts in a well-ventilated
area, and take care that there is no spark or flame
anywhere near the working areas. Do not use
gasoline or low flash-point solvents to clean parts.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


ENGINE BOTTOM END/TRANSMISSION 8-11
Crankcase

Support the crankcase bearing boss with a suitable re-


tainer [A].
Install the new bearing [B] with a press and the bearing
driver set [C].
Special Tool - Bearing Driver Set: 57001-1129

NOTICE
Support the crankcase bearing boss when the bear-
ing is pressed, or the crankcase could be damaged.

Left Crankcase
Press the new oil seal [A] so that the flat surface [B] faces
outside of the engine, and its surface is flush with the end
of the hole.
Press the new crankshaft bearing [C] until it bottoms out.
Special Tool - Bearing Driver Set: 57001-1129

Press in the new drive shaft bearing [A] until it is bottomed.


Press in the new output shaft bearing [B] so that the
stepped side [C] faces inside of the engine until it is
bottomed.
Special Tool - Bearing Driver Set: 57001-1129

Install the output shaft bearing retainers [A].


bearing retainer
Apply a non-permanent locking agent to the output shaft
screws [B].
Tighten:
Torque - Output Shaft Bearing Retainer Screws: 5.2 Nm
(0.53 kgfm, 46 inlb)

Press the new output shaft oil seal [A] and shift shaft oil
seal [B] so that the flat surface faces outside of the engine,
and its surface is flush with the crankcase surface.
Special Tool - Bearing Driver Set: 57001-1129

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


8-12 ENGINE BOTTOM END/TRANSMISSION
Crankcase
Right Crankcase
Press the new crankshaft oil seal [A] so that the flat sur-
face [B] faces outside of the engine, and until it is bot-
tomed.
Press the new crankshaft bearing [C] until it is bottomed.
Special Tool - Bearing Driver Set: 57001-1129

Press the new output shaft bearing [A] and new drive shaft
bearing [B] until they are bottomed.
Special Tool - Bearing Driver Set: 57001-1129

Install the drive shaft bearing retainer bolts [A].


Tighten:
Torque - Drive Shaft Bearing Retainer Bolts: 9.4 Nm (1.0
kgfm, 83 inlb)

Install the new shift drum bearing [A] so that the sealed
side [B] faces outside of the engine.
Install the shift drum bearing retainer [C] and tighten the
shift drum bearing retainer bolts [D].
Torque - Shift Drum Bearing Retainer Bolts: 9.4 Nm (1.0
kgfm, 83 inlb)

Press the bearings [A] until they are bottomed.


Special Tool - Bearing Driver Set: 57001-1129

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


ENGINE BOTTOM END/TRANSMISSION 8-13
Crankcase

Install:
Crankshaft (see Crankshaft Installation)
Transmission Shafts (see Transmission Shaft Installa-
tion)
Shift Drum (see Transmission Shaft Installation)
Shift Fork and Shift Rod
Position the connecting rod in BDC.
Install the crankshaft jig [A] between the crankshaft fly-
wheels.
Special Tool - Crankshaft Jig: 57001-1174
Check to see that the dowel pins [B] are in place in the
mating surfaces of the crankcase halves.

Using a high flash-point solvent, clean off any oil or dirt


that may be on the liquid gasket coating area. Dry them
with a clean cloth.
Apply liquid gasket to the mating surface [A] of the left
crankcase half.
Sealant - Liquid Gasket, TB1215: 92104-1065

NOTE
Make the application finish within 60 minutes when the
liquid gasket to the mating surface of the left crankcase
half is applied.
Moreover fit the case and tighten the case bolts just
after finishing the application of the liquid gasket.

Using a suitable tool on the left crankcase to press around


the hole for the crankshaft, fit the crankcase halves to-
gether with a press on the tool.
[A] Press
[B] Connecting Rod
[C] Crankshaft Jig
NOTE
Constantly check the alignment of the two crankcase
halves, the position of the transmission shafts, and shift
drum. The front and rear of the crankcase must be
pushed together evenly.

Remove the crankshaft jig from the flywheel.


Tighten the crankcase bolts, starting with the around of
the crankshaft, then outward.
Tighten the [7] bolt together with the clamp.
Torque - Crankcase Bolts: 9.4 Nm (1.0 kgfm, 87 inlb)

NOTE
After tightening the crankcase bolts, wipe up the liquid
gasket seeping out around the mating surface.

Make sure that the crankshaft, drive shaft, and output


shaft, rotate smoothly (in the neutral position).
If the crankshaft will not turn, probably the crankshaft is
not centered; tap the mount portion of the engine with a
plastic hammer to reposition it. If it does not free up, split
the crankcase again and find the cause.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


8-14 ENGINE BOTTOM END/TRANSMISSION
Crankcase

Install the gear positioning lever and shift drum cam (see
External Shift Mechanism Installation).
Check to see that gears shift smoothly from 1st to 6th
gear, and 6th to 1st while spinning the output shaft.
Set the shift drum in the neutral position.
Replace the O-rings [A] on the output shaft with new ones.
Install the O-rings
Apply grease to the O-rings.
O-rings. on the output shaft while expanding the

Insert the collar [B] with the groove [C] faces inside.
Install the removed parts (see appropriate chapters).

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


ENGINE BOTTOM END/TRANSMISSION 8-15
Crankshaft
Crankshaft Removal
Disassemble
bly).
the crankcase (see Crankcase Disassem-

Remove the transmission shafts and shift drum (see


Transmission Shaft Removal).
Using a press, remove the crankshaft [A] from the right
crankcase.

If the bearing stay on the crankshaft when splitting the


crankcase, or removing the crankshaft from the right
crankcase, remove the bearings from the crankshaft with
a bearing puller [A].
Special Tools - Bearing Puller: 57001-135
Bearing Puller Adapter [B]: 57001-136

Crankshaft Installation
Install the crankshaft oil seal and bearing (see Crankcase
assembly).
Position the connecting rod in BDC.
wheels to protect
Insert the crankshaft jig [A] between the crankshaft fly-
flywheel alignment, and press the crank-
shaft into the right crankcase.
When pressing, position the jig in the crankcase opening
so the jig does not hit the crankcase.
Special Tool - Crankshaft Jig: 57001-1174
Apply 2-stroke oil to the connecting rod big end bearing.
Crankshaft Disassembly
Since the assembly of the crankshaft demands exacting
tolerances, the disassembly and reassembly of the crank-
shaft can only be done by a shop having the necessary tools
and equipment.
If it should be necessary to disassemble the crankshaft,
use a press to remove the crankpin.
Crankshaft Assembly
Since the assembly of the crankshaft demands exacting
tolerances, the disassembly and reassembly of the crank-
shaft can only be done by a shop having the necessary tools
and equipment.
Check that the connecting rod radial clearance is within
specification (see Connecting Rod Big End Radial Clear-
ance Inspection).
Press the crank halves onto the crankpin until the con-
necting rod side clearance is within specification (see
Connecting Rod Big End Side Clearance Inspection).
Adjust crankshaft runout until it is within specification (see
Crankshaft Runout Inspection).

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


8-16 ENGINE BOTTOM END/TRANSMISSION
Crankshaft
Crankshaft Inspection
Connecting Rod Big End Radial Clearance Inspection
Set the crankshaft on V blocks, and place a dial gauge [A]
against the connecting rod big end.
Push [B] the connecting rod first towards the gauge and
then in the opposite direction. The difference between
two gauge readings is the radial clearance.
Connecting Rod Big End Radial Clearance
Standard: 0.029 0.041 mm (0.0011 0.0016 in.)
Service Limit: 0.09 mm (0.004 in.)
If the radial clearance exceeds the service limit, crank-
shaft should be either replaced or disassembled and
crankpin, needle bearing, and connecting rod big end
should be examined for wear.
Connecting Rod Big End Side Clearance Inspection
Refer to the Crankshaft Inspection in the Periodic Main-
tenance chapter.
Crankshaft Runout Inspection
Set the crankshaft in a flywheel alignment jig or on V
blocks, and place a dial gauge and turn the crankshaft
slowly. The maximum difference in gauge reading is the
crankshaft runout.
7.5 mm (0.30 in.) [A]
Crankshaft Runout
Standard: TIR 0.03 mm (0.001 in.) or less
Service Limit: TIR 0.08 mm (0.003 in.)
If the runout at either point exceeds the service limit, re-
place the crankshaft assembly with a new one or align the
crankshaft so that the runout falls within the service limit.

First correct the horizontal misalignment by striking the


projecting crank half [A] with a plastic, soft lead, or brass
hammer.
Recheck the runout with a dial gauge and repeat the
process until the runout falls within the service limit.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


ENGINE BOTTOM END/TRANSMISSION 8-17
Crankshaft

Next, correct the vertical misalignment by either driving a


wedge [A] in between the crank halves or by squeezing
them in a vise, depending on the nature of the misalign-
ment.
NOTICE
Do not hammer the crank half at the point [B].
If flywheel misalignment cannot be corrected by the above
method, replace the crankpin or the crankshaft itself.

Connecting Rod Big End Seizure Inspection


In case of serious seizure with damaged flywheels, the
crankshaft must be replaced.
In case of less serious damage, disassemble the crank-
shaft and replace the crankpin, needle bearing, and con-
necting rod.
Connecting Rod Bend Inspection
Remove the connecting rod.
ing rod bigarbor
Select an [A] of the same diameter as the connect-
end, and insert the arbor through the connect-
ing rod big end.
Select an arbor [B] of the same diameter as the piston
pin and more than 105 mm (4.13 in.) long, and insert the
arbor through the connecting rod small end.
On a surface plate, set the big-end arbor on a V block [C].
With the connecting rod held vertically, use a height
gauge to measure the difference in the height of the
arbor above the surface plate over a 100 mm (3.94 in.)
length to determine the amount of connecting rod bend.
If connecting rod bend exceeds the service limit, the con-
necting rod must be replaced.
Connecting Rod Bend
Service Limit: TIR 0.2/100 mm (0.008/3.94 in.)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


8-18 ENGINE BOTTOM END/TRANSMISSION
Crankshaft
Connecting Rod Twist Inspection
With the big-end arbor [A] still on the V block [B], hold the
connecting rod horizontally and measure the amount that
the arbor [C] varies from being parallel with the surface
plate over a 100 mm (3.94 in.) length of the arbor to de-
termine the amount of connecting rod twist.
If connecting rod twist exceeds the service limit, the con-
necting rod must be replaced.
Connecting Rod Twist
Service Limit: TIR 0.2/100 mm (0.008/3.94 in.)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


ENGINE BOTTOM END/TRANSMISSION 8-19
Transmission
Transmission Shaft Removal
Disassemble
bly).
the crankcase (see Crankcase Disassem-

Remove:
Shift Rods [A]
Shift Forks [B]
Shift Drum [C]
Remove the drive shaft [D] and output shaft [E] together.

Transmission Shaft Installation


Apply engine oil to the following parts:
Transmission Shafts
Transmission Gears
Shift Drum
Shift Forks

Install the drive shaft [A] and output shaft [B] in the right
crankcase with their gears meshed.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


8-20 ENGINE BOTTOM END/TRANSMISSION
Transmission

Install the shift drum [A].


Fit the output shaft shift forks [B] into the proper gear
grooves.
Insert the shift rod [C] temporary.
grooves.shift fork guide pin into the proper shift drum
Fit the

Install the shift rod securely.


Install the
Fit the drive shaft shift fork [D] into the proper position.
Check thatshift rod [E] securely.
Assembly the crankcase
each shaft moves smoothly.
(see Crankcase Assembly).

Transmission Shaft Disassembly


Remove
Removal).
the transmission shafts (see Transmission Shaft

Remove the circlips and disassemble the transmission


shafts completely.
Special Tool - Outside Circlip Pliers: 57001-144

NOTE
Do not reuse the removed circlips.
Transmission Shaft Assembly
Apply engine oil liberally to the transmission shaft, gears
and bearings.
Replace any circlips that were removed with new ones.
Always install the circlips [A] so that the opening [B] is
aligned with a spline groove [C], and install toothed wash-
ers. To install a circlip without damage, first fit the circlip
onto the shaft expanding it just enough to install it, and
then use a suitable gear to push the circlip into place.
Special Tool - Outside Circlip Pliers: 57001-144

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


ENGINE BOTTOM END/TRANSMISSION 8-21
Transmission

The drive shaft gears can be identified by size; the small-


est diameter gear is 1st gear, and the largest is 6th. Be
sure that all parts are put back in the correct sequence,
facing the proper direction, and that all circlips and washer
are properly in place.
The output shaft gears can be identified by size; the
largest diameter gear is 1st gear, and the smallest is
6th. Be sure that all parts are put back in the correct
sequence, facing the proper direction, and that the circlip
is properly in place.

1. 2nd Gear (16T) 9. Output Shaft


2. 5th Gear (22T) 10. 2nd Gear (30T)
3. Spacer 11. Circlip (Large)
4. Circlip (Small) 12. 5th Gear (24T)
5. 3rd Gear (18T) 13. 3rd Gear (27T)
6. 4th Gear (20T) 14. 4th Gear (25T)
7. 6th Gear (23T) 15. 6th Gear (22T)
8. Drive Shaft (1st Gear, 13T) 16. 1st Gear (33T)
Check that each gear spins or slides freely on the trans-
mission shaft without binding after assembly.
Shift Fork Bending Inspection
Visually inspect the shift forks, and replace any fork that is
bent. A bent fork could cause difficulty in shifting, or allow
the transmission to jump out of gear when under power.
90 [A]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


8-22 ENGINE BOTTOM END/TRANSMISSION
Transmission
Shift Fork/Gear Groove Wear Inspection
Measure the thickness [A] of the shift fork ears, and mea-
sure the width [B] of the gear grooves (with which the fork
engages).
Shift Fork Ear Thickness
Standard: 3.9 4.0 mm (0.15 0.16 in.)
Service Limit: 3.8 mm (0.15 in.)

Gear Groove Width


Standard: 4.05 4.15 mm (0.159 0.163 in.)
Service Limit: 4.3 mm (0.17 in.)
If the thickness of a shift fork ear is less than the service
limit, the shift fork must be replaced.
If the gear groove is worn exceeding the service limit, the
gear must be replaced.
Shift Fork Guide Pin/Shift Drum Groove Wear
Inspection
Measure the diameter [A] of each shift fork guide pin, and
measure the width [B] of each shift drum groove.
Shift Fork Guide Pin Diameter
Standard: 5.9 6.0 mm (0.23 0.24 in.)
Service Limit: 5.8 mm (0.23 in.)

Shift Drum Groove Width


Standard: 6.05 6.20 mm (0.238 0.244 in.)
Service Limit: 6.3 mm (0.25 in.)
If the guide pin on any shift fork is less than the service
limit, the fork must be replaced.
If any shift drum groove is worn exceeding the service
limit, the drum must be replaced.
Gear Damage Inspection
Visually inspect the gear dogs [A] and gear dog holes [B].
Replace any damaged gears or gears with excessively
worn dogs or dog holes.
Visually inspect the gear teeth [C] on the transmission
gears.
Replace lightly damaged gear teeth with an oilstone. The
gear must be replaced if the teeth are badly damaged.
When gear is repaired or replaced, the driving gear should
also be inspected and repaired or replaced if necessary.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


ENGINE BOTTOM END/TRANSMISSION 8-23
External Shift Mechanism
Shift Pedal Removal
Remove:
Shift Pedal Bolt [A]
Shift Pedal [B]

Shift Pedal Installation


Install the shift pedal so that the punch mark [A] on the
pedal aligns with the punch mark [B] on the shift shaft.
Tighten the shift pedal bolt [C].
Torque - Shift Pedal Bolt: 9.8 Nm (1.0 kgfm, 87 inlb)

External Shift Mechanism Removal


Drain the transmission oil (see Transmission Oil Change
In the Periodic Maintenance chapter).
Remove:
Shift Pedal (see Shift Pedal Removal)
Clutch (see Clutch Removal in the Engine Right Side
chapter)
Right Engine Cover (see Right Engine Cover Removal
in the Engine Right Side Chapter)
Shift Shaft Assembly [A]
Gear Positioning Lever Spring [B]
Gear Positioning Lever Bolt [C]
Gear Positioning Lever [D]
Collar
Shift Drum Cam Bolt [E]
Shift Drum Cam [F]
Pin
External Shift Mechanism Installation
Install:
Pin [A]
Shift Drum Cam [B]
Fit the hole [C]on the pin.
Torque:
Torque - Shift Drum Cam Bolt: 23 Nm (2.3 kgfm, 17 ftlb)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


8-24 ENGINE BOTTOM END/TRANSMISSION
External Shift Mechanism

Install the gear positioning lever [A] as shown.


Collar [B]
Gear Positioning Lever Bolt [C]
Spring [D]
Tighten:
Torque - Gear Positioning Lever Bolt: 9.4 Nm (1.0 kgfm,
83 inlb)

Insert the shift shaft assembly [A].


Take care not to damage the oil seal when inserting the
shift shaft assembly.
Install the removed parts (see appropriate chapters).

External Shift Mechanism Inspection


Check the shift shaft [A] for bending or damage to the
splines.
If the shaft is bent, straighten or replace it. If the splines
are damaged, replace the external shift mechanism.
Check the return spring [B] and arm spring [C] for cracks
or distortion.
If the springs are damaged in any way, replace them.
Check the shift mechanism arm [D] for distortion.
If the shift mechanism arm is damaged in any way, re-
place the shift mechanism.
Check that the return spring pin is not loose.
If it is loose, unscrew it, apply a non-permanent locking
agent to the threads, and tighten it to the specified torque.
Torque - Shift Shaft Return Spring Pin: 22 Nm (2.2 kgfm,
16 ftlb)
Check the gear positioning lever, and the spring for cracks
or distortion.
If the lever or spring is damaged in any way, replace them.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


ENGINE BOTTOM END/TRANSMISSION 8-25
Bearings/Oil Seals
Bearing Replacement
NOTICE
Do not remove the ball or needle bearings unless it
is necessary. Removal may damage them.

Using a press or puller, remove the ball bearing and/or


needle bearings.
NOTE
In the absence of the above mentioned tools, satisfac-
tory results may be obtained by heating the case to ap-
proximately 93C (200F) max, and tapping the bearing
in or out.

NOTICE
Do not heat the case with a torch. This will warp the
case. Soak the case in oil and heat the oil.

Using a press and the bearing driver set [A], install the
new ball bearing until it stops at the bottom of its housing.
The new needle bearings must be pressed into the
crankcase so that the end is flush with the end of the
hole.
Special Tool - Bearing Driver Set: 57001-1129

Bearing Wear Inspection


NOTICE
Do not remove the bearings for inspection. Re-
moval may damage them.

Inspect the ball bearings.


Since the ball bearings are made to extremely close toler-
ances, the wear must be judged by feel rather than mea-
surement.
Clean each bearing in a high flash-point solvent, dry it (do
not spin the bearing while it is dry), and oil it with engine
oil.

Spin [A] the bearing by hand to check its condition.


If the bearing is noisy, does not spin smoothly, or has any
rough spots, replace it.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


8-26 ENGINE BOTTOM END/TRANSMISSION
Bearings/Oil Seals

Inspect the needle bearings.


The rollers in a needle bearing normally wear very little,
and wear is difficult to measure. Instead of measuring,
inspect the bearing for abrasion, color change, or other
damage.
If there is any doubt as to the condition of a needle bear-
ing, replace it.
Oil Seal Inspection
Inspect the oil seals.
Replace the oil seal if the lips are deformed, discolored
(indicating that the rubber has deteriorated), hardened or
otherwise damaged.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


WHEELS/TIRES 9-1

Wheels/Tires
Table of Contents
Exploded View........................................................................................................................ 9-2
Specifications ......................................................................................................................... 9-4
Special Tools .......................................................................................................................... 9-5
Wheels (Rims) ........................................................................................................................ 9-6
Front Wheel Removal ....................................................................................................... 9-6
Front Wheel Installation .................................................................................................... 9-6
Rear Wheel Removal........................................................................................................ 9-7
Rear Wheel Installation..................................................................................................... 9-8
Wheels Inspection............................................................................................................. 9-9
Spoke Tightness Inspection.............................................................................................. 9-9
Rim Runout Inspection...................................................................................................... 9-9
Rim Installation Position.................................................................................................... 9-9
Axle Inspection.................................................................................................................. 9-10
Tires........................................................................................................................................ 9-11
Air Pressure Inspection/Adjustment.................................................................................. 9-11
Tire Removal..................................................................................................................... 9-11
Tire Installation.................................................................................................................. 9-12
Hub Bearing............................................................................................................................ 9-14
9
Front Hub Bearing Removal ............................................................................................. 9-14
Rear Hub Bearing Removal .............................................................................................. 9-14
Hub Bearing Installation.................................................................................................... 9-14
Hub Bearing Inspection..................................................................................................... 9-15
Hub Bearing Lubrication ................................................................................................... 9-15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


9-2 WHEELS/TIRES
Exploded View

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


WHEELS/TIRES 9-3
Exploded View

Torque
No. Fastener Remarks
Nm kgfm ftlb
1 Spoke Nipples 4.0 0.41 35 inlb
2 Front Axle Nut 78 8.0 58 R
3 Rear Axle Nut 78 8.0 58 R
HG: Apply high-temperature grease.
R: Replacement Parts
WL: Apply soap and water solution or rubber lubricant.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


9-4 WHEELS/TIRES
Specifications

Item Standard Service Limit


Wheels (Rims)
Rim Runout (with tire installed):
Axial TIR 1.0 mm (0.04 in.) or less TIR 2.0 mm (0.08 in.)
Radial TIR 1.0 mm (0.04 in.) or less TIR 2.0 mm (0.08 in.)
Axle Runout/100 mm (3.94 in.):
Front TIR 0.1 mm (0.004 in.) or less TIR 0.2 mm (0.008 in.)
Rear TIR 0.03 mm (0.001 in.) or less TIR 0.2 mm (0.008 in.)
Rim Size:
Front
KX85C 17 1.40
KX85D/KX100F 19 1.40
Rear:
KX85C 14 1.60
KX85D/KX100F 16 1.85
Tires
Air Pressure (when cold):
Front 100 125 kPa (1.02 1.27
kgf/cm, 14.5 18.1 psi)
100 125 kPa (1.02 1.27
Rear
kgf/cm, 14.5 18.1 psi)
Standard Tires:
Front:
Size:
KX85C 70/100-17 40M
KX85D/KX100F 70/100-19 42M
Make DUNLOP
Type MX51F
Rear:
Size:
KX85C 90/100-14 49M
KX85D/KX100F 90/100-16 52M
Make DUNLOP
Type MX51

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


WHEELS/TIRES 9-5
Special Tools
Inside Circlip Pliers: Bearing Remover Shaft, 9:
57001-143 57001-1265

Rim Protector: Bearing Remover Head, 10 12:


57001-1063 57001-1266

Bearing Driver Set: Bearing Remover Head, 15 17:


57001-1129 57001-1267

Jack: Jack Attachment:


57001-1238 57001-1608

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


9-6 WHEELS/TIRES
Wheels (Rims)
Front Wheel Removal
Remove:
Cotter Pin [A]
Front Axle Nut [B]
Raise the front wheel off the ground with jack.
Special Tools - Jack: 57001-1238
Jack Attachment: 57001-1608
Pull out the axle and remove the wheel.

Remove the collars [A] on both sides.


NOTICE
Do not lay the wheel on the ground with the disc
facing down. This can damage or warp the disc.
Place blocks under the wheel so the disc does not
touch the ground.

Insert a wood wedge between the brake pads.


This prevents them from being moved out of their proper
position, should the brake lever be squeezed accidentally.
Front Wheel Installation
Apply high-temperature grease to the grease seal lips [A].
Install the
Install collars [B] to the hub on both sides.
the front wheel.

Replace the front axle nut [A] with a new one.


Tighten: axle [B] from left side.
Insert the

Torque - Front Axle Nut: 78 Nm (8.0 kgfm, 58 ftlb)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


WHEELS/TIRES 9-7
Wheels (Rims)

Replace the cotter pin [A] with a new one.


Bend the cotter
Insert a new cotter pin.
pin over the axle.
WARNING
A loose axle nut can lead to an accident resulting in
serious injury or death. Tighten the axle nut to the
proper torque and install a new cotter pin.

Remove the jack.


brake drag.front brake for good braking power and no
Check the

WARNING
After servicing, it takes several applications of the
brake lever before the brake pads contact the disc,
which could result in increased stopping distance
and cause an accident resulting in injury or death.
Do not attempt to ride the motorcycle until a firm
brake lever is obtained by pumping the lever until
the pads are against the disc.

Rear Wheel Removal


Raise the rear wheel off the ground with jack.
Special Tools - Jack: 57001-1238
Jack Attachment: 57001-1608

Squeeze the front brake lever, and hold it with a band [A]
to prevent the motorcycle from running forward.
WARNING
Motorcycle may fall over unexpectedly resulting in
an accident or injury. Be sure to hold the front brake
when removing the rear wheel.

NOTICE
Be sure to hold the front brake when removing the
rear wheel, or the motorcycle may fall over. The rear
wheel or the motorcycle could be damaged.

Remove:
Caliper Guard Mounting Bolts [A]
Caliper Guard [B]
Cotter Pin [C]
Rear Axle Nut [D] and Washer
Rear Caliper with the Hose installed (see Caliper Re-
moval in the Brakes chapter)
Pull out the axle [E], and remove the chain adjuster [F] on
both sides.
Disengage the drive chain from the rear sprocket.
Remove the rear wheel.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


9-8 WHEELS/TIRES
Wheels (Rims)

Remove the collars [A] on both sides.


NOTICE
Do not lay the wheel on the ground with the disc
facing down. This can damage or warp the disc.
Place blocks under the wheel so the disc does not
touch the ground.

Insert a wood wedge between the brake pads.


This prevents them from being moved out of their proper
position, should the brake pedal be squeezed acciden-
tally.
Rear Wheel Installation
Slide the groove of the caliper holder [A] through the stop
[B] of the swingarm [C], and install the rear caliper [D] to
the holder.
Tighten:
Torque - Rear Caliper Mounting Bolts: 25 Nm (2.5 kgfm,
18 ftlb)

Apply high-temperature grease to the grease seal lips [A].


Install the collars [B] to the hub on both sides.

Install the rear wheel.


Install thethechain
Engage drive chain with the rear sprocket.
Replace the rearadjusters [A] on the swingarm.
Insert the axle from left side, anda tighten
axle nut with new one.
the rear axle nut.
Torque - Rear Axle Nut: 78 Nm (8.0 kgfm, 58 ftlb)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


WHEELS/TIRES 9-9
Wheels (Rims)

Replace the cotter pin [A] with a new one.


Bend the cotter
Insert a new cotter pin.
pin over the axle.
WARNING
A loose axle nut can lead to an accident resulting in
serious injury or death. Tighten the axle nut to the
proper torque and install a new cotter pin.

Adjust the drive chain slack (see Drive Chain Slack In-
spection in the Periodic Maintenance chapter).
Check the rear brake for good braking power and no
brake drag.
WARNING
After servicing, it takes several applications of the
brake pedal before the brake pads contact the disc,
which could result in increased stopping distance
and cause an accident resulting in injury or death.
Do not attempt to ride the motorcycle until a firm
brake pedal is obtained by pumping the pedal until
the pads are against the disc.

Wheels Inspection
Refer to the Wheel Bearing Inspection in the Periodic
Maintenance chapter.
Spoke Tightness Inspection
Refer to the Spoke Tightness Inspection in the Periodic
Maintenance chapter.
Rim Runout Inspection
Refer to the Rim Runout Inspection in the Periodic Main-
tenance chapter.
Rim Installation Position
When installing the rim, set the rim following position.
Install the front rim so that the marked side faces left.
The distance [A] from the brake disc seating surface [B]
of the front hub [C] to left end of the front rim [D] should
be as follows.
[E] View from Rear
Distance: 24 0.5 mm (0.94 0.02 in.)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


9-10 WHEELS/TIRES
Wheels (Rims)

Install the rear rim so that the marked side faces left.
The distance [A] from the brake disc seating surface [B]
of the rear hub [C] to right end of the rear rim [D] should
be as follows.
[E] View from Rear
Distance: 30.25 0.5 mm (1.191 0.02 in.)

Check the rim runout (see Rim Runout Inspection in the


Periodic Maintenance chapter).
Axle Inspection
Visually inspect the front and rear axle for damages.
If the axle is damaged or bent, replace it.
Place the axle on V blocks that are 100 mm (3.94 in.)
[A] apart, and set a dial gauge [B] on the axle at a point
halfway between the blocks.
Turn [C] the axle to measure the runout.
The difference between the highest and lowest dial read-
ings is the amount of runout.
Axle Runout/100 mm (3.94 in.)
Standard:
Front TIR 0.1 mm (0.004 in.) or less
Rear TIR 0.03 mm (0.001 in.) or less
Service Limit: TIR 0.2 mm (0.008 in.)
If the runout exceeds the service limit, replace the axle.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


WHEELS/TIRES 9-11
Tires
Air Pressure Inspection/Adjustment
Refer to the Air Pressure Inspection/Adjustment in the Pe-
riodic Maintenance chapter.
Tire Removal
Remove the wheel (see Front/Rear Wheel Removal).
NOTICE
Do not lay the wheel directly on the ground with
the disc facing down. This can damage or warp the
disc. Place blocks under the wheel so that the disc
does not touch the ground.

To maintain wheel balance, mark [A] the air valve position


on the tire with chalk so that the tire can be reinstalled in
the same position.
Align [B]
Remove the air valve cap [C].

Take out the valve core [A] to let out the air.
Remove the air valve nut.

Loosen the bead protector nut [A] on the rear wheel.


a soap andthewater
Lubricate tire beads and rim flanges on both sides with
solution or rubber lubricant. This helps
the tire beads slip off the rim flanges.
NOTICE
Never lubricate with engine oil or petroleum distil-
lates because they will deteriorate the tire.

Break the beads away from both sides of the rim with a
commercially available bead breaker.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


9-12 WHEELS/TIRES
Tires

Lubricate a commercially available tire irons [A] and rim


protectors [B] with soap and water solution or rubber lu-
bricant.
Special Tool - Rim Protector: 57001-1063
Step on the side of the tire opposite air valve, and pry the
tire off the rim with the tire irons protecting the rim with rim
protectors.
NOTICE
Take care not to insert the tire irons so deeply that
the tube gets damaged.

Remove the tube and bead protector when one side of


the tire is pried off.
Pry the other side of the tire off the rim.
Tire Installation
NOTE
The tires should be installed so that the ID serial NO.
[A] faces to left side.

Inspect the rim and tire before installing the tire, and re-
place them if necessary.
Install the tube band onto the rim.
the tire bead
Apply a soap and water solution or rubber lubricant to both
and rim flange.

Position the tire on the rim so that the air valve [A] is at
the tire balance mark [B] (the chalk mark made during
removal).
NOTE
The new tire is no marked.
Insert
loosely.
the valve stem into the rim, and screw the nut on

Fit the rim protectors and use a commercially available


tire irons to install the tire bead.
Special Tool - Rim Protector: 57001-1063

NOTICE
To prevent rim damage, be sure to place the rim
protectors at any place the tire irons are applied.

Install
valve.
the tire on the rim from the opposite side of the air

Fit the rim protectors and insert the tire irons so deeply
that the tube is not damaged.
Install the bead protector onto the rear rim.
Similarly, slip the tire bead over the rim on the other side.
Check that the tube is not pinched between the tire and
rim.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


WHEELS/TIRES 9-13
Tires

Tighten the bead protector nut [A] (rear wheel only), air
valve nut [B] and air valve cap [C].
Adjust the tire air pressure to the specified pressure (see
Air Pressure Inspection/Adjustment in the Periodic Main-
tenance chapter).

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


9-14 WHEELS/TIRES
Hub Bearing
Front Hub Bearing Removal
Remove:
Front Wheel (see Front Wheel Removal)
Grease Seals [A]
Circlip [B]
Special Tool - Inside Circlip Pliers: 57001-143

Use the bearing remover to remove the hub bearings [A].


NOTICE
Do not lay the wheel on the ground with the disc
facing down. This can damage or warp the disc.
Place wooden blocks under the wheel so that the
disc does not touch the ground.

Special Tools - Bearing Remover Shaft, 9 [B]: 57001-1265


Bearing Remover Head, 10 12 [C]:
57001-1266
Remove the collar [D].
Rear Hub Bearing Removal
Remove:
Rear Wheel (see Rear Wheel Removal)
Grease Seals [A]
Circlip [B]
Special Tool - Inside Circlip Pliers: 57001-143

Use the bearing remover to remove the hub bearings [A].


NOTICE
Do not lay the wheel on the ground with the disc
facing down. This can damage or warp the disc.
Place wooden blocks under the wheel so that the
disc does not touch the ground.

Special Tools - Bearing Remover Shaft, 9 [B]: 57001-1265


Bearing Remover Head, 15 17 [C]:
57001-1267
Remove the collar [D].
Hub Bearing Installation
Before installing the hub bearings, blow any dirt or foreign
particles out of the hub with compressed air to prevent
contamination of the bearings.
Replace the bearings with new ones.
NOTE
Install the bearings so that the marked side or sealed
side faces out.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


WHEELS/TIRES 9-15
Hub Bearing

Install the bearings [A] by using the bearing driver set [B].
Special Tool - Bearing Driver Set: 57001-1129

Hub Bearing Inspection


Since the hub bearings are made to extremely close tol-
erances, the clearance cannot normally be measured.
NOTE
Do not remove any bearings for inspection. If any bear-
ings are removed, they will need to be replaced with
new ones.

Turn each bearing in the hub back and forth [A] while
checking for plays, roughness, or binding.
If bearing play roughness, or binding is found, replace the
bearing.
Examine the bearing seal [B] for tears or leakage.
If the seal is torn or is leaking, replace the bearing.
Hub Bearing Lubrication
NOTE
Since the hub bearings are packed with grease and
sealed, lubrication is not required.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
FINAL DRIVE 10-1

Final Drive
Table of Contents
Exploded View........................................................................................................................ 10-2
Specifications ......................................................................................................................... 10-4
Special Tool ............................................................................................................................ 10-5
Drive Chain............................................................................................................................. 10-6
Drive Chain Slack Inspection ............................................................................................ 10-6
Drive Chain Slack Adjustment .......................................................................................... 10-6
Wheel Alignment Inspection ............................................................................................. 10-6
Wheel Alignment Adjustment............................................................................................ 10-6
Drive Chain Wear Inspection ............................................................................................ 10-6
Drive Chain Lubrication..................................................................................................... 10-6
Drive Chain Removal ........................................................................................................ 10-6
Drive Chain Installation ..................................................................................................... 10-7
Sprockets................................................................................................................................ 10-8
Engine Sprocket Removal ................................................................................................ 10-8
Engine Sprocket Installation ............................................................................................ 10-8
Rear Sprocket Removal.................................................................................................... 10-8
Rear Sprocket Installation................................................................................................. 10-9
Sprocket Wear Inspection................................................................................................. 10-9
Rear Sprocket Warp (Runout) Inspection ......................................................................... 10-9
10

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


10-2 FINAL DRIVE
Exploded View

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


FINAL DRIVE 10-3
Exploded View

Torque
No. Fastener Remarks
Nm kgfm ftlb
1 Rear Sprocket Nuts 34 3.5 25 R, S
HO: Apply heavy oil.
L: Apply a non-permanent locking agent.
R: Replacement Parts
S: Follow the specified tightening sequence.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


10-4 FINAL DRIVE
Specifications

Item Standard Service Limit


Drive Chain
Drive Chain Slack 54 64 mm (2.1 2.5 in.)
Drive Chain 20-link Length 254.0 254.6 mm (10.00 10.02 in.) 259 mm (10.2 in.)
Standard Chain:
Make DAIDO
Type DID 420DS2
Link:
KX85C 120 links
KX85D/KX100F 124 links
Sprockets
Rear Sprocket Warp TIR 0.4 mm (0.016 in.) or less TIR 0.5 mm (0.020 in.)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


FINAL DRIVE 10-5
Special Tool
Outside Circlip Pliers:
57001-144

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


10-6 FINAL DRIVE
Drive Chain
Drive Chain Slack Inspection
Refer to the Drive Chain Slack Inspection in the Periodic
Maintenance chapter.
Drive Chain Slack Adjustment
Refer to the Drive Chain Slack Adjustment in the Periodic
Maintenance chapter.
Wheel Alignment Inspection
Check that the notch [A] of the chain adjuster [B] aligns
with the same swingarm mark [C] as the other side one.
WARNING
Misalignment of the wheel will result in abnormal
wear and may result in an unsafe riding condition.
Be sure the wheel is properly aligned.

Wheel Alignment Adjustment


This procedure is the same as Drive Chain Slack Adjust-
ment (see Drive Chain Slack Adjustment in the Periodic
Maintenance chapter).
Drive Chain Wear Inspection
Refer to the Drive Chain Wear Inspection in the Periodic
Maintenance chapter.
Drive Chain Lubrication
Refer to the Drive Chain Lubrication in the Periodic Main-
tenance chapter.
Drive Chain Removal
Remove the magneto cover (see Magneto Cover Re-
moval in the Electrical System chapter).
Remove the clip [A] from the master link [B] with pliers.

Remove:
Link Plate [A]
Master Link [B]
Drive Chain [C]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


FINAL DRIVE 10-7
Drive Chain
Drive Chain Installation
Fit the drive chain onto the engine and rear sprockets.
Place the drive chain [A] ends on the rear sprocket [B].
Install the master link [C] from the wheel side.

Install the link plate [A] so that the mark [B] faces out.
pointedthein the
Install clip [C] so that the closed end [D] of the U
direction of chain rotation [E].
Adjust the drive chain slack (see Drive Chain Slack Ad-
justment in the Periodic Maintenance chapter).
Install the magneto cover (see Magneto Cover Installation
in the Electrical System chapter).

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


10-8 FINAL DRIVE
Sprockets
Engine Sprocket Removal
Remove the magneto cover (see Magneto Cover Re-
moval in the Electrical system chapter).

Remove the circlip [A] from the output shaft.


Special Tool - Outside Circlip Pliers: 57001-144
Remove the engine sprocket [B] from the drive chain [C].

Engine Sprocket Installation


Engage the drive chain [A] to the engine sprocket [B] and
install the engine sprocket on the output shaft [C].
Install the engine sprocket so that the groove of the en-
gine sprocket faces outward.
Replace the circlip with a new one.
Install the new circlip on the groove of the output shaft.
Special Tool - Outside Circlip Pliers: 57001-144
Install the magneto cover (see Magneto Cover Installation
in the Electrical System chapter).
Rear Sprocket Removal
Loosen the rear sprocket nuts [A].
Wheels/Tires
Remove the rear wheel (see Rear Wheel Removal in the
chapter).
NOTICE
Do not lay the wheel on the ground with the disc
facing down. This can damage or warp the disc.
Place blocks under the wheel so that the disc does
not touch the ground.

Remove:
Rear Sprocket Nuts [A] and Washers
Rear Sprocket [B]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


FINAL DRIVE 10-9
Sprockets
Rear Sprocket Installation
Replace the rear sprocket nuts with new ones.
faces out. rear sprocket [A] so that the marked side [B]
Install the

Install the rear sprocket nuts and washers.


Wheels/Tires
Install the rear wheel (see Rear Wheel Installation in the
chapter).
And then do alsoofthe
Tighten the one rear sprocket nuts by specified torque.
right next nut, and repeat that until
tighten the all other nuts. Finally retighten the first tighten
nut by specified torque.
Torque - Rear Sprocket Nuts: 34 Nm (3.5 kgfm, 25 ftlb)

Sprocket Wear Inspection


Refer to the Sprocket Wear Inspection in the Periodic
Maintenance chapter.
Rear Sprocket Warp (Runout) Inspection
Refer to the Rear Sprocket Warp (Runout) Inspection in
the Periodic Maintenance chapter.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
BRAKES 11-1

Brakes
Table of Contents
Exploded View........................................................................................................................ 11-2
Specifications ......................................................................................................................... 11-6
Special Tools .......................................................................................................................... 11-7
Brake Lever, Brake Pedal....................................................................................................... 11-8
Brake Lever Play Adjustment............................................................................................ 11-8
Brake Pedal Position Adjustment...................................................................................... 11-8
Brake Pedal Removal ....................................................................................................... 11-8
Brake Pedal Installation .................................................................................................... 11-8
Brake Fluid ............................................................................................................................. 11-10
Brake Fluid Level Inspection............................................................................................. 11-10
Brake Fluid Change .......................................................................................................... 11-10
Brake Line Bleeding.......................................................................................................... 11-11
Caliper .................................................................................................................................... 11-14
Caliper Removal ............................................................................................................... 11-14
Caliper Installation ............................................................................................................ 11-14
Caliper Disassembly/Assembly......................................................................................... 11-15
Fluid Seal Damage Inspection .......................................................................................... 11-15
Dust Seal Damage Inspection .......................................................................................... 11-15
Caliper Dust Boot and Friction Boot Damage Inspection.................................................. 11-16
Caliper Piston and Cylinder Damage Inspection .............................................................. 11-16
Caliper Holder Shaft Wear Inspection............................................................................... 11-17
Brake Pad............................................................................................................................... 11-18 11
Brake Pad Removal .......................................................................................................... 11-18
Brake Pad Installation ....................................................................................................... 11-19
Brake Pad Inspection........................................................................................................ 11-19
Master Cylinder ...................................................................................................................... 11-20
Front Master Cylinder Removal ........................................................................................ 11-20
Front Master Cylinder Installation ..................................................................................... 11-20
Rear Master Cylinder Removal......................................................................................... 11-21
Rear Master Cylinder Installation...................................................................................... 11-21
Master Cylinder Disassembly/Assembly........................................................................... 11-22
Master Cylinder Inspection (Visual Inspection)................................................................. 11-22
Brake Disc .............................................................................................................................. 11-23
Brake Disc Removal ......................................................................................................... 11-23
Brake Disc Installation ...................................................................................................... 11-23
Brake Disc Inspection ....................................................................................................... 11-23
Brake Hose............................................................................................................................. 11-24
Brake Hose Removal/Installation...................................................................................... 11-24
Brake Hose Inspection...................................................................................................... 11-24

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


11-2 BRAKES
Exploded View

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


BRAKES 11-3
Exploded View

Torque
No. Fastener Remarks
Nm kgfm ftlb
1 Brake Hose Banjo Bolts 25 2.5 18
2 Front Brake Reservoir Cap Screws 1.5 0.15 13 inlb
3 Front Master Cylinder Clamp Bolts 8.8 0.90 78 inlb S
4 Brake Lever Pivot Bolt 5.9 0.60 52 inlb Si
5 Brake Lever Pivot Bolt Locknut 5.9 0.60 52 inlb
6 Front Brake Disc Mounting Bolts 9.8 1.0 87 inlb L
7 Bleed Valve 7.8 0.80 69 inlb
8 Front Caliper Mounting Bolts 25 2.5 18
B: Apply brake fluid.
L: Apply a non-permanent locking agent.
R: Replacement Parts
S: Follow the specified tightening sequence.
Si: Apply silicone grease (ex. PBC grease).

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


11-4 BRAKES
Exploded View

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


BRAKES 11-5
Exploded View

Torque
No. Fastener Remarks
Nm kgfm ftlb
1 Brake Hose Banjo Bolts 25 2.5 18
2 Rear Master Cylinder Mounting Bolts 9.8 1.0 87 inlb
3 Rear Master Cylinder Push Rod Locknut 17.5 1.78 12.9
4 Brake Pedal Bolt 25 2.5 18 G
5 Rear Caliper Mounting Bolts 25 2.5 18
6 Rear Caliper Holder Bolt 22.1 2.25 16.3 L
7 Rear Brake Pad Pins 17.2 1.75 12.7
8 Bleed Valve 7.8 0.80 69 inlb
9 Rear Brake Disc Mounting Bolts 9.8 1.0 87 inlb L
B: Apply brake fluid.
G: Apply grease.
L: Apply a non-permanent locking agent.
R: Replacement Parts
Si: Apply silicone grease (ex. PBC grease).

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


11-6 BRAKES
Specifications

Item Standard Service Limit


Brake Lever
Brake Lever Free Play Adjustable (to suit rider)
Brake Fluid
Grade:
Front DOT3 or DOT4
Rear DOT4
Brake Pads
Lining Thickness:
Front 4.0 mm (0.16 in.) 1 mm (0.04 in.)
Rear 4.0 mm (0.16 in.) 1 mm (0.04 in.)
Brake Discs
Thickness:
Front 2.85 3.15 mm (0.112 0.124 in.) 2.5 mm (0.098 in.)
Rear 2.85 3.15 mm (0.112 0.124 in.) 2.5 mm (0.098 in.)
Runout TIR 0.15 mm (0.0059 in.) or less TIR 0.3 mm (0.01 in.)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


BRAKES 11-7
Special Tools
Jack: Jack Attachment:
57001-1238 57001-1608

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


11-8 BRAKES
Brake Lever, Brake Pedal
Brake Lever Play Adjustment
Refer to the Brake Lever and Pedal Adjustment in the
Periodic Maintenance chapter.
Brake Pedal Position Adjustment
Refer to the Brake Lever and Pedal Adjustment in the
Periodic Maintenance chapter.
Brake Pedal Removal
Remove:
Cotter Pin [A]
Joint Pin [B]
Washer [C]
NOTE
Pull off the joint pin while pressing down the brake
pedal.

Remove:
Brake Pedal Bolt [A]
Brake Pedal Return Spring [B]
Brake Pedal [C]

Brake Pedal Installation


Install the return spring [A].

Replace the O-rings [A] with new ones.


brake pedal bolt.
Apply grease to the O-rings and shaft portion [B] of the

Install the brake pedal [C].


Tighten:
Torque - Brake Pedal Bolt: 25 Nm (2.5 kgfm, 18 ftlb)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


BRAKES 11-9
Brake Lever, Brake Pedal

Replace the cotter pin with a new one.


Bend the ends
Install the joint pin, washer and new cotter pin.
Check the brake[A] pedal
of the cotter pin.
Pedal Adjustment in the Periodic
position (see Brake Lever and
Maintenance chapter).

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


11-10 BRAKES
Brake Fluid

WARNING
When working with the disc brake, observe the pre-
cautions listed below.
Never reuse old brake fluid.
Do not use fluid from a container that has been left
unsealed or that has been open for a long time.
Do not mix two types and brands of fluid for use
in the brake. This lowers the brake fluid boiling
point and could cause the brake to be ineffective.
It may also cause the rubber brake parts to dete-
riorate.
Dont leave the reservoir cap off for any length of
time to avoid moisture contamination of the fluid.
Dont change the fluid in the rain or when a strong
wind is blowing.
Except for the disc pads and disc, use only disc
brake fluid, isopropyl alcohol, or ethyl alcohol for
cleaning of the brake parts. Do not use any other
fluid for cleaning these parts. Gasoline, engine
oil, or any other petroleum distillate will cause de-
terioration of the rubber parts. Oil spilled on any
part will be difficult to wash off completely and will
eventually deteriorate the rubber used in the disc
brake.
When handling the disc pads or disc, be careful
that no disc brake fluid or any oil gets on them.
Clean off any fluid or oil that inadvertently gets on
the pads or disc with a high flash-point solvent.
Do not use one which will leave an oily residue.
Replace the pads with new ones if they cannot be
cleaned satisfactorily.
Brake fluid quickly ruins painted surfaces; any
spilled fluid should be completely wiped up im-
mediately.
If any of the brake line fittings or the bleed valve is
opened at any time, the AIR MUST BE BLED FROM
THE BRAKE LINE.

Brake Fluid Level Inspection


Refer to the Brake Fluid Level Inspection in the Periodic
Maintenance chapter.
Brake Fluid Change
Refer to the Brake Fluid Change in the Periodic Mainte-
nance chapter.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


BRAKES 11-11
Brake Fluid
Brake Line Bleeding
The brake fluid has a very low compression coefficient so
that almost all the movement of the brake lever or pedal
is transmitted directly to the caliper for braking action. Air,
however, is easily compressed. When air enters the brake
lines, brake lever or pedal movement will be partially used
in compressing the air. This will make the lever or pedal feel
spongy, and there will be a loss in braking power.
WARNING
Air in the brake lines diminish braking performance
and can cause an accident resulting in injury or
death. If the brake lever has a soft or "spongy" feel-
ing mushy when it is applied, there might be air in
the brake lines or the brake may be defective. Do
not operate the vehicle and service the brake sys-
tem immediately.

Level the brake fluid reservoir.


Front Brake Reservoir
Remove:
Brake Reservoir Cap Screws [A]
Reservoir Cap [B]
Diaphragm
Check that there is plenty of fluid in the reservoir.
Slowly pump the brake lever several times until no air
bubbles rise up from the bottom of the reservoir.
Bleed the air completely from the master cylinder by this
operation.
Rear Brake Reservoir
Remove:
Rear Brake Reservoir Mounting Bolt [A] and Washer
Brake Reservoir [B]
Brake Reservoir Cap [C]

NOTE
The procedure to bleed the front brake line is as follows.
Bleeding the rear brake line is the same as for the front
brake.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


11-12 BRAKES
Brake Fluid

Remove
caliper.
the rubber cap [A] from the bleed valve on the

Attach a clear plastic hose [B] to the bleed valve on the


caliper, and run the other end of the hose into a container.

Bleed the brake line and caliper as follows:


Repeat this operation until no more air can be seen com-
ing out into the clear plastic hose.
1. Pump the brake lever until it becomes hard, and apply
the brake and hold it [A].
2. Quickly open and close [B] the bleed valve while holding
the brake applied.
3. Release the brake [C].
NOTE
The fluid level must be checked often during the bleed-
ing operation and replenished with fresh brake fluid as
necessary. If the fluid in the reservoir runs almost out
any time during bleeding operation, the bleeding opera-
tion must be done over again from the beginning since
air will have entered the line.
Tap the brake hose lightly from the caliper to the reser-
voir for easier bleeding.

Remove the clear plastic hose.


Tighten the bleed valve, and install the rubber cap.
Torque - Bleed Valve: 7.8 Nm (0.80 kgfm, 69 inlb)
Check the fluid level (see Brake Fluid Level Inspection in
the Periodic Maintenance chapter).
Front Brake Reservoir
Install the diaphragm and reservoir cap.
Tighten:
Torque - Front Brake Reservoir Cap Screws: 1.5 Nm (0.15
kgfm, 13 inlb)

Rear Brake Reservoir


Follow procedure below to install the rear brake fluid
reservoir cap correctly.
First, tighten the rear brake fluid reservoir cap [B] clock-
wise [C] by hand until slight resistance is felt indicating
that the cap is seated on the reservoir body, then tighten
the cap an additional 1/6 turn [D] while holding the brake
fluid reservoir body [A].
Install:
Rear Brake Reservoir
Rear Brake Reservoir Mounting Bolts and Washers
Tighten:
Torque - Rear Master Cylinder Mounting Bolts: 9.8 Nm (1.0
kgfm, 87 inlb)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


BRAKES 11-13
Brake Fluid

After bleeding is done, check the brake for good braking


power, no brake drag, and no fluid leakage.
WARNING
After servicing, it takes several applications of the
brake lever or pedal before the brake pads contact
the disc, which could result in increased stopping
distance and cause an accident resulting in injury
or death. Do not attempt to ride the motorcycle until
a firm brake lever or pedal is obtained by pumping
the lever or pedal until the pads are against the disc.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


11-14 BRAKES
Caliper
Caliper Removal
Front Brake
Loosen the brake pad pin [A] before the caliper [B] re-
moval if the caliper is to be disassembled.
Loosen the banjo bolt [C] so as not to spill brake fluid.
Remove:
Caliper Mounting Bolts [D]
Banjo Bolt
Caliper
NOTICE
Immediately wipe up any brake fluid that is spilled.

Rear Brake
Remove:
Caliper Guard Mounting Bolts [A]
Caliper Guard [B]

Remove the plug [A] and loosen the brake pad pins [B]
and caliper holder bolt [C] before the caliper removal if
the caliper [D] is to be disassembled.
Loosen the banjo bolt [E] so as not to spill brake fluid.
Remove:
Rear Wheel (see Rear Wheel Removal in the
Wheels/Tires chapter)
Caliper Mounting Bolts [F]
Banjo Bolt
Caliper
NOTICE
Immediately wipe up any brake fluid that is spilled.

Caliper Installation
Install the brake pad if it was removed (see Brake Pad
Installation).
Front Brake
Install the caliper and tighten the bolts.
Torque - Front Caliper Mounting Bolts: 25 Nm (2.5 kgfm,
18 ftlb)
Rear Brake
Install the rear wheel (see Rear Wheel Installation in the
Wheels/Tires chapter).
Install the caliper and tighten the bolts.
Torque - Rear Caliper Mounting Bolts: 25 Nm (2.5 kgfm,
18 ftlb)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


BRAKES 11-15
Caliper

Install the brake hose lower end.


with newthe
Replace washers [A] on each side of hose fitting [B]
ones.
Tighten:
Torque - Brake Hose Banjo Bolt: 25 Nm (2.5 kgfm, 18 ftlb)

Install the removed parts (see appropriate chapters).


Check thebrake
Bleed the line (see Brake Line Bleeding).
and no fluidbrake for good braking power, no brake drag,
leakage.
WARNING
After servicing, it takes several applications of the
brake lever or pedal before the brake pads contact
the disc, which could result in increased stopping
distance and cause an accident resulting in injury
or death. Do not attempt to ride the motorcycle until
a firm brake lever or pedal is obtained by pumping
the lever or pedal until the pads are against the disc.

Caliper Disassembly/Assembly
Refer to the Caliper Rubber Parts Replacement in the Pe-
riodic Maintenance chapter.
Fluid Seal Damage Inspection
The fluid seal(s) [A] around the piston maintains the
proper pad/disc clearance. If this seal is not in good condi-
tion, pad wear will increase, and constant pad drag on the
disc will raise brake and brake fluid temperature.
Replace the fluid seal(s) under any of the following con-
ditions.
Fluid leakage around the pad
Brakes overheat
There is a large difference in piston side pad and another
side pad wear.
The seal is stuck to the piston.
If the fluid seal(s) is replaced, replace the dust seal(s) [B]
as well. Also, replace all seals every other time the pads
are changed.
[C] Front Caliper
[D] Rear Caliper

Dust Seal Damage Inspection


Check that the dust seal(s) is not cracked, worn, swollen,
or otherwise damaged.
If they show any damage, replace them.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


11-16 BRAKES
Caliper
Caliper Dust Boot and Friction Boot Damage
Inspection
Check that the dust boot [A] and friction boot [B] are not
cracked, worn, swollen, or otherwise damaged.
If they show any damage, replace it.
[C] Front Caliper
[D] Rear Caliper

Caliper Piston and Cylinder Damage Inspection


Visually
[B].
inspect the piston(s) [A] and cylinder surface(s)

Replace the caliper if the cylinder and piston are badly


scores or rusty.
[C] Front Caliper
[D] Rear Caliper

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


BRAKES 11-17
Caliper
Caliper Holder Shaft Wear Inspection
The caliper body must slide smoothly on the caliper holder
shaft(s) [A]. If the body does not slide smoothly, one pad
will wear more than the other, pad wear will increase, and
constant drag on the disc will raise brake and brake fluid
temperature.
Check to see that the caliper holder shaft(s) is not badly
worn or stepped, and that the friction boot [B] is not dam-
aged.
If the friction boot is damaged, replace the friction boot.
To replace the friction boot, remove the pads and caliper
bracket.
If the caliper holder shaft(s) is damaged, replace the
caliper holder.
Torque - Rear Caliper Holder Bolt: 22.1 Nm (2.25 kgfm,
16.3 ftlb)
[C] Front Caliper
[D] Rear Caliper

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


11-18 BRAKES
Brake Pad
Brake Pad Removal
Front Brake
Loosen the pad pin [A].
Remove the front caliper [B] with the hose installed (see
Caliper Removal).

Remove:
Pad Pin [A]
Piston Side Pad [B]
Push the caliper holder [C] toward the piston, and then
remove the pad [D] from the caliper holder shaft.

Rear Brake
Remove the caliper guard (see Caliper Removal).
Loosen the pad pins [A].
Remove the rear caliper [B] with the hose installed (see
Caliper Removal).

Remove:
Pad Pins [A]
Piston Side Pad [B]
Push the caliper holder [C] toward the piston, and then
remove the pad [D] from the caliper holder shaft.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


BRAKES 11-19
Brake Pad
Brake Pad Installation
Push
go.
the caliper piston(s) in by hand as far as they will

Install
[B].
the piston side pad [A] first, and then another pad

The piston side pad of the calipers has a wear protecting


shim. Be careful not to mix it up with the other pad.
[C] Front Brake
[D] Rear Brake
Tighten the brake pad pin(s) [E].
Torque - Rear Brake Pad Pins: 17.2 Nm (1.75 kgfm, 12.7
ftlb)

Install the caliper (see the Caliper Installation)


Check the brake for good braking power, no brake drag,
and no fluid leakage.
WARNING
After servicing, it takes several applications of the
brake lever or pedal before the brake pads contact
the disc, which could result in increased stopping
distance and cause an accident resulting in injury
or death. Do not attempt to ride the motorcycle until
a firm brake lever or pedal is obtained by pumping
the lever or pedal until the pads are against the disc.

Brake Pad Inspection


Refer to the Brake Pad Wear Inspection in the Periodic
Maintenance chapter.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


11-20 BRAKES
Master Cylinder
NOTICE
Brake fluid quickly ruins painted or plastic sur-
faces; any spilled fluid should be completely
washed up immediately.

Front Master Cylinder Removal


Remove the banjo bolt [A] to disconnect the brake hose
upper end [B] from the master cylinder [C].
When removing the brake hose, temporarily secure the
end of the brake hose to some high place to keep fluid
loss to a minimum.
NOTICE
Immediately wash away any brake fluid that spills.

Remove the clamp bolts [A], and take off the master cylin-
der [B] as an assembly with the brake lever.

Front Master Cylinder Installation


Position the master cylinder so that the vertical parting
line [A] of the master cylinder clamps align with the punch
mark [B] on the handlebar.
[C] 21.4 mm (0.84 in.)
[D] 23 mm (0.91 in.)
NOTICE
Immediately wash away any brake fluid that spills.

The master cylinder clamp must be installed with the ar-


row mark [A] upward.
Tighten the upper clamp bolt [B] first, and then the lower
clamp bolt [C].
There will be a gap at the lower mating surface of the
clamp after tightening.
Torque - Front Master Cylinder Clamp Bolts: 8.8 Nm (0.90
kgfm, 78 inlb)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


BRAKES 11-21
Master Cylinder

Install the brake hose (see Brake Hose Replacement in


the Periodic Maintenance chapter).
Replace the washers [A] on each side of hose fitting [B]
with new ones.
Tighten:
Torque - Brake Hose Banjo Bolt: 25 Nm (2.5 kgfm, 18 ftlb)
Bleed the brake line (see Brake Line Bleeding).
and nothe
Check brake for good braking power, no brake drag,
fluid leakage.
WARNING
After servicing, it takes several applications of the
brake lever before the brake pads contact the disc,
which could result in increased stopping distance
and cause an accident resulting in injury or death.
Do not attempt to ride the motorcycle until a firm
brake lever is obtained by pumping the lever until
the pads are against the disc.

Rear Master Cylinder Removal


Remove the brake pedal [A] (see Brake Pedal Removal).
move thethe
Remove master cylinder mounting bolts [B], and re-
master cylinder [C] backward.
Remove the brake hose banjo bolt [D].
When removing the brake hose, temporarily secure the
end of the brake hose to some high place to keep fluid
loss to a minimum.
NOTICE
Immediately wash away any brake fluid that spills.

Rear Master Cylinder Installation


Install the brake hose (see Brake Hose Replacement in
the Periodic Maintenance chapter).
Replace the washers [A] on each side of hose fitting [B]
with new ones.
Tighten:
Torque - Brake Hose Banjo Bolt: 25 Nm (2.5 kgfm, 18 ftlb)

NOTICE
Immediately wash away any brake fluid that spills.

Install the rear master cylinder.


Tighten:
Torque - Rear Master Cylinder Mounting Bolts: 9.8 Nm (1.0
kgfm, 87 inlb)

Install the brake pedal (see Brake Pedal Installation).

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


11-22 BRAKES
Master Cylinder

Check the brake pedal position (see Brake Lever and


Pedal Adjustment in the Periodic Maintenance chapter).
Bleed the brake line (see Brake Line Bleeding).
and nothe
Check brake for good braking power, no brake drag,
fluid leakage.
WARNING
After servicing, it takes several applications of the
brake pedal before the brake pads contact the disc,
which could result in increased stopping distance
and cause an accident resulting in injury or death.
Do not attempt to ride the motorcycle until a firm
brake pedal is obtained by pumping the pedal until
the pads are against the disc.

Master Cylinder Disassembly/Assembly


Refer to the Brake Master Cylinder Rubber Parts Re-
placement in the Periodic Maintenance chapter.
Master Cylinder Inspection (Visual Inspection)
Disassemble the front and rear master cylinders.
inner wall of eachare
Check that there no scratches, rust or pitting on the
master cylinder [A] and on the outside
of each piston [B].
If a master cylinder or piston shows any damage, replace
them.
Inspect the primary [C] and secondary [D] cups.
If a cup is worn, damaged, softened (rotted), or swollen,
the piston assembly should be replace to renew the cups.
If fluid leakage is noted at the brake lever, the piston as-
sembly should be replaced to renew the cup.
Check the dust covers [E] for damage.
If they are damaged, replace them.
Check that the relief [F] and supply [G] ports are not
plugged.
If the small relief port becomes plugged, the brake pads
will drag on the disc. Blow the ports clean with com-
pressed air.
Check the piston return springs [H] for any damage.
If a spring is damaged, replace it.
Front Master Cylinder [I]
Rear Master Cylinder [J]

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


BRAKES 11-23
Brake Disc
Brake Disc Removal
Remove the wheels (see Front/Rear Wheel Removal in
the Wheels/Tires chapter).
Remove the mounting bolts [A], and take off the disc [B].

Brake Disc Installation


Install the brake disc on the wheel so that the marked side
[A] faces out.
Apply a non-permanent locking agent to the threads of
the brake disc mounting bolts [B].
Tighten:
Torque - Front Brake Disc Mounting Bolts: 9.8 Nm (1.0
kgfm, 87 inlb)
Rear Brake Disc Mounting Bolts: 9.8 Nm (1.0
kgfm, 87 inlb)

Brake Disc Inspection


Visually inspect the disc [A].
If it is scratched or damaged, replace the disc.
Measure the thickness of each disc at the point [B] where
it has worn the most.
Disc Thickness
Standard: 2.85 3.15 mm (0.112 0.124 in.)
Service Limit: 2.5 mm (0.098 in.)
Replace the disc if it has worn past the service limit.

Place a jack under the motorcycle so that the front/rear


wheel is raised off the ground.
Special Tools - Jack: 57001-1238
Jack Attachment: 57001-1608
Set up a dial gauge against the disc [A].
For the front disc, turn the handlebars fully to one side.
Measure
slowly.
the disc runout while rotating [B] the wheel

Disc Runout
Standard: TIR 0.15 mm (0.0059 in.) or less
Service Limit: TIR 0.3 mm (0.01 in.)
If the runout exceeds the service limit, replace the disc.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


11-24 BRAKES
Brake Hose
Brake Hose Removal/Installation
Refer to the Brake Hose Replacement in the Periodic
Maintenance chapter.
Brake Hose Inspection
Refer to the Brake Hoses and Connections Inspection in
the Periodic Maintenance chapter.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


SUSPENSION 12-1

Suspension
Table of Contents
Exploded View................................... 12-2 Rear Shock Absorber
Specifications .................................... 12-6 Disassembly (Oil Change) ........ 12-21
Special Tools ..................................... 12-7 Rear Shock Absorber Assembly .. 12-21
Front Fork .......................................... 12-9 Rear Shock Absorber Inspection . 12-21
Air Pressure Adjustment .............. 12-9 Rear Shock Absorber Bearing
Compression Damping Removal .................................... 12-22
Adjustment ................................ 12-9 Rear Shock Absorber Bearing
Oil Change ................................... 12-10 Installation ................................. 12-22
Front Fork Removal ..................... 12-10 Rear Shock Absorber Scrapping . 12-22
Front Fork Installation .................. 12-11 Swingarm........................................... 12-23
Front Fork Disassembly ............... 12-12 Swingarm Removal...................... 12-23
Front Fork Assembly.................... 12-13 Swingarm Installation................... 12-24
Front Fork Top Plug Inspection .... 12-14 Swingarm Bearing Removal ........ 12-24
Compression Valve Assembly Swingarm Bearing Installation ..... 12-24
Inspection.................................. 12-15 Drive Chain Guide, Guide Roller,
Cylinder Unit Inspection ............... 12-15 Chain Slipper Wear Inspection.. 12-24
Inner Tube Inspection .................. 12-15 Swingarm Bearing, Sleeve
Dust Seal Inspection .................... 12-16 Inspection.................................. 12-25
Front Fork Spring Tension Tie-Rod, Rocker Arm ......................... 12-26
Inspection.................................. 12-16 Tie-Rod Removal ......................... 12-26
Rear Shock Absorber ........................ 12-17 Tie-Rod Installation ...................... 12-26
Rear Shock Absorber Adjustment 12-17 Rocker Arm Removal................... 12-26
Rebound Damping Adjustment .... 12-17 Rocker Arm Installation................ 12-28
Compression Damping Rocker Arm Bearing Removal ..... 12-28 12
Adjustment (Gas Reservoir)...... 12-17 Rocker Arm Bearing Installation .. 12-28
Spring Preload Adjustment .......... 12-18 Needle Bearing Inspection........... 12-29
Rear Shock Absorber Spring Uni-Trak Maintenance ....................... 12-30
Tension Inspection .................... 12-19 Uni-Trak Linkage Inspection ........ 12-30
Rear Shock Absorber Removal ... 12-19 Tie-Rod and Rocker Arm Sleeve
Rear Shock Absorber Installation 12-20 Wear Inspection ........................ 12-30
Rear Shock Absorber Spring Tie-Rod and Rocker Arm
Replacement ............................. 12-20 Mounting Bolt Bend Inspection . 12-30

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


12-2 SUSPENSION
Exploded View

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


SUSPENSION 12-3
Exploded View

Torque
No. Fastener Remarks
Nm kgfm ftlb
1 Air Pressure Relief Screws 1.3 0.13 12 inlb
2 Front Fork Top Plugs 28 2.9 21
3 Front Fork Clamp Bolts (Upper) 20 2.0 15
4 Front Fork Clamp Bolts (Lower) 20 2.0 15 AL
5 Front Fork Push Rod Nuts 15 1.5 11
6 Compression Valve Assembly 55 5.6 41 L
AL: Tighten the two clamp bolts alternately two times to ensure even tightening torque.
G: Apply grease.
L: Apply a non-permanent locking agent.
R: Replacement Parts

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


12-4 SUSPENSION
Exploded View

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


SUSPENSION 12-5
Exploded View

Torque
No. Fastener Remarks
Nm kgfm ftlb
1 Rocker Arm Bracket Bolts 83 8.5 61 2T
2 Rocker Arm Pivot Nut 83 8.5 61 R
3 Tie-Rod Mounting Nuts 59 6.0 44 R
4 Compression Damping Adjuster 17.5 1.78 12.9
5 Rear Shock Absorber Mounting Bolt (Upper) 39 4.0 29
6 Rear Shock Absorber Mounting Bolt (Lower) 39 4.0 29
7 Swingarm Pivot Shaft Nut 69 7.0 51 R
G: Apply grease.
R: Replacement Parts
2T: Apply 2-stroke oil.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


12-6 SUSPENSION
Specifications

Item Standard Service Limit


Front Fork
Air Pressure Atmospheric pressure
Compression Damper Setting:
KX85C 10 clicks counterclockwise (Adjustable Range)
20 clicks
KX85D/KX100F 14 clicks counterclockwise (Adjustable Range)
20 clicks
Suspension Oil: Kawasaki KHL15-10 or equivalent
Amount 310 4 mL (10.5 0.1 US oz.) (Adjustable Range)
295 325 mL (9.97
11.0 US oz.)
Fork Oil Level 95 2 mm (3.74 0.08 in.) (Adjustable Range)
75 115 mm (2.95
4.53 in.)
Fork Spring Free Length 430 mm (16.9 in.) 422 mm (16.6 in.)
Rear Shock Absorber
Rebound Damper Setting 11 clicks counterclockwise (Adjustable Range)
21 clicks
Compression Damper Setting:
10 clicks counterclockwise (Adjustable Range)
KX85C
24 clicks
14 clicks counterclockwise (Adjustable Range)
KX85D/KX100F
24 clicks
Spring Preload Setting Position:
Standard 67.5 mm (2.66 in.)
Usable Range 63 81 mm (2.5 3.2 in.)
Rear Shock Spring Free Length 256 mm (10.1 in.) 251 mm (9.88 in.)
Suspension Oil: Kawasaki KHV10-K2C or equivalent
Amount 162 mL (5.48 US oz.)
Gas Pressure 980 kPa (10.0 kgf/cm, 142 psi)
Uni-Trak Maintenance
Sleeve Outside Diameter:
Tie-Rod 17.989 18.000 mm (0.70823
17.96 mm (0.7071 in.)
0.70866 in.)
Rocker Arm:
Large 17.989 18.000 mm (0.70823
17.96 mm (0.7071 in.)
0.70866 in.)
Small 15.950 16.000 mm (0.62795
15.92 mm (0.6268 in.)
0.62992 in.)
TIR 0.2 mm (0.008
Rocker Arm Mounting Bolt Runout TIR 0.1 mm (0.004 in.) or less
in.)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


SUSPENSION 12-7
Special Tools
Spring Compressor: Bearing Remover Head, 15 17:
57001-1087 57001-1267

Hook Wrench R37.5, R42: Fork Oil Seal Driver, 36:


57001-1101 57001-1352

Bearing Driver Set: Fork Cylinder Holder:


57001-1129 57001-1413

Jack: Hook Wrench R=35:


57001-1238 57001-1580

Bearing Remover Shaft, 9: Jack Attachment:


57001-1265 57001-1608

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


12-8 SUSPENSION
Special Tools
Fork Oil Seal Driver Weight, 48 54: Fork Oil Seal Driver Attachment, 36 46:
57001-1796 57001-1798

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


SUSPENSION 12-9
Front Fork
Air Pressure Adjustment
The standard air pressure in the front fork legs is atmo-
spheric (0 kPa, 0 kgf/cm, 0 psi). Air pressure in the fork
legs increase with normal use, so the fork action stiffens
during operation. Release air pressure from the fork legs
prior to each race through the air pressure relief screw lo-
cated in front fork top plug.
Place the jack under the frame so that the front wheel is
raised off the ground.
Special Tools - Jack: 57001-1238
Jack Attachment: 57001-1608

Remove the air pressure relief screws [A] on each front


fork top plug [B].
NOTE
Do not use the side stand when adjusting the air pres-
sure.
Adjust the air pressure when the front forks are cold.
Replace the O-rings with new ones.
Tighten:
Torque - Air Pressure Relief Screws: 1.3 Nm (0.13 kgfm,
12 inlb)

Compression Damping Adjustment


Place the jack under the frame so that the front wheel is
raised off the ground.
Special Tools - Jack: 57001-1238
Jack Attachment: 57001-1608

Clean the bottom of the fork tubes.


Remove the caps [A] on the both bottom of the fork tubes.

Turn the compression damping adjuster [A] on the com-


pression valve assembly [B] with a standard tip screw-
driver until you feel a click. Adjust the compression damp-
ing to suit your preference under certain condition.
NOTICE
Do not force the compression damping adjuster
beyond the fully seated position, or the adjusting
mechanism may be damaged.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


12-10 SUSPENSION
Front Fork
Seated position [A]: adjuster turned fully clockwise.
Compression Damper Settings
Standard:
KX85C 10 clicks counterclockwise [B]
KX85D/KX100F 14 clicks counterclockwise [C]
Softer (Counterclockwise) [D]
Harder (Clockwise) [E]
*: Although you can turn the adjuster beyond the ad-
justable range, effecting no changes to damping
force, use it within the adjustable range.

NOTICE
The right and left fork tubes must be adjusted
evenly.

Install the caps on the both bottom of the fork tubes.


Oil Change
Refer to the Front Fork Oil Change in the Periodic Main-
tenance chapter.
Front Fork Removal
Remove:
Number Plate (see Number Plate Removal in the Frame
chapter)
Brake Hose Clamp Bolts [A] and Brake Hose Clamps [B]
(Left Side only)
Front Fork Protector Mounting Bolts [C] and Front Fork
Protector [D] (Both Sides)
Front Caliper Mounting Bolts [E]
Front Wheel (see Front Wheel Removal in the
Wheels/Tires chapter)

Put the caliper [A] on suitable stand [B] so that it does not
dangle.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


SUSPENSION 12-11
Front Fork

Loosen the upper [A] and lower [B] front fork clamp bolts.

Pull out the front fork downward with a twisting motion [A].

Front Fork Installation


Install the front fork.
The height [A] between the top end of the outer tube [B]
and upper surface of the steering stem head [C].
Standard Fork Height
[D] KX85C: 18 mm (0.71 in.)
[E] KX85D/KX100F: 0 mm (0 in.)

NOTICE
Both fork heights should be adjusted evenly.

NOTE
Steering is greatly affected by the fork height. The less
the fork height, the lighter the front end becomes and
the greater the tendency for understeering and washout
due to weight biasing. Increasing the fork height has
opposite effects.
Be sure that the front tire does not touch the fender
when the fork is fully compressed. Make this adjust-
ment in 10 mm (0.39 in.) steps.

Run the cables and hoses according to the Cable, Wire,


and Hose Routing section in the Appendix chapter.
Tighten:
Torque - Front Fork Clamp Bolts (Upper): 20 Nm (2.0
kgfm, 15 ftlb)
Front Fork Clamp Bolts (Lower): 20 Nm (2.0
kgfm, 15 ftlb)

NOTE
Tighten the two clamp bolts (lower) alternately two times
to ensure even tightening torque.

Install the front fork protectors so that they do not touch


the front fork outer tubes.
Install the removed parts (see appropriate chapters).
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
12-12 SUSPENSION
Front Fork
Front Fork Disassembly
Drain the fork oil (see Front Fork Oil Change in the Peri-
odic Maintenance chapter).
Hold the fork leg horizontally in a vise.
Remove thethecapouter
Compress tube.
on the bottom of the front fork tube.

Stop the cylinder unit [A] from turning by using the fork
cylinder holder [B]. Unscrew the compression valve as-
sembly [C], and take the compression valve assembly
and gasket [D] out of the bottom of the inner tube [E].
Special Tool - Fork Cylinder Holder: 57001-1413

Remove the push rod [A] and cylinder unit [B] from the
top of the outer tube [C].

Separate
follows:
the inner tube [A] from the outer tube [B] as

Slide up the spring band [C].


Slide up the dust seal [D].

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


SUSPENSION 12-13
Front Fork
Remove the retaining ring [A] from the outer tube [B].

Grasp the tubes and stroke the inner tube [A] up and down
[B] several times. The shock to fork seal separates the
inner tube from the outer tube [C].

Remove:
Bushings [A]
Washer [B]
Oil Seal [C]
Retaining Ring [D]
Dust Seal [E]
Spring Band [F]
Wipe off the oil from the removed parts.

Front Fork Assembly


Replace the following parts with new ones:
Dust Seal [A] with Spring Band
Retaining Ring [B]
Oil Seal [C]
Bushings [D]
Place an oil coated plastic bag [E] over the end of the
inner tube to protect the oil seals.
The inner tube bushings groove has a sharp edge [F] that
cut out the sealing lip of the seals as they are pushed
down over the inner tube.
Apply grease to the oil seal.
Install in order these parts on the inner tube.
NOTE
Install the dust seal (Spring band side down), retaining
ring and oil seal (marked side down).

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


12-14 SUSPENSION
Front Fork

When assembling the new outer tube bushings, washer


and new oil seal [A], hold the oil seal against the new one,
and tap the oil seal with the fork oil seal driver [B] until it
stops.
Special Tools - Fork Oil Seal Driver, 36:57001-1352 or
Fork Oil Seal Driver Weight, 48 54:
57001-1796
Fork Oil Seal Driver Attachment, 36 46:
57001-1798
Install the retaining ring to the outer tube.
band on the
Push the dust seal into the outer tube, and put the spring
dust seal.

Replace the gasket [A] and O-rings [C] of the compression


valve assembly [B] with a new ones.
Apply a non-permanent locking agent to the threads [D]
of the compression valve and screw the valve assembly
into the bottom of the inner tube.
Install the cylinder unit with a fork cylinder holder, and
tighten the compression valve assembly to the specified
torque.
Special Tool - Fork Cylinder Holder: 57001-1413
Torque - Compression Valve Assembly: 55 Nm (5.6 kgfm,
41 ftlb)

Install the push rod [A] so that the longer taper [B] is down.
Tighten:the front fork push rod nut [C].
Install

Torque - Front Fork Push Rod Nuts: 15 Nm (1.5 kgfm, 11
ftlb)
Pour the fork oil (see Front Fork Oil Change in the Periodic
Maintenance chapter).

Front Fork Top Plug Inspection


Inspect the front fork top plug [A] for damage.
If the front fork top plug is damaged, replace it with a new
one.
Replace the O-ring [B] on the front fork top plug with a
new one.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


SUSPENSION 12-15
Front Fork
Compression Valve Assembly Inspection
Inspect the threads portion [A] of the compression valve
assembly [B] for damage.
If they are damaged, replace the compression valve as-
sembly with a new one.
Replace the O-rings [C] with new ones.

Cylinder Unit Inspection


Inspect the piston rod [A] of the cylinder unit [B] for
scratches or bending.
If it has scratches or is bent, replace the cylinder unit with
a new one.

Inner Tube Inspection


Visually inspect the inner tube [A].
If there is any damage, replace the inner tube. Since
damage to the inner tube damages the oil seal and dust
seal, replace the oil seal and dust seal whenever the inner
tube is replaced.
NOTICE
If the inner tube is badly bent or creased, replace
it. Excessive bending, followed by subsequent
straightening, can weaken the inner tube.

Temporarily assemble the inner [A] and outer [B] tubes,


and pump them back and forth manually to check for
smooth operation.
If you feel binding or catching, the inner and outer tubes
must be replaced.
WARNING
A straightened inner or outer fork tube may fall in
use, possibly causing an accident resulting in seri-
ous injury or death. Replace a badly bent or dam-
aged inner or outer tube and inspect the other tube
carefully before reusing it.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


12-16 SUSPENSION
Front Fork
Dust Seal Inspection
Inspect
damage.
the dust seal [A] for any signs of deterioration or

Replace it if necessary.

Front Fork Spring Tension Inspection


Since a spring becomes shorter as it weakens, check its
free length [A] to determine its condition.
If the spring is shorter than the service limit, it must be
replaced.
Fork Spring Free Length
Standard: 430 mm (16.9 in.)
Service Limit: 422 mm (16.6 in.)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


SUSPENSION 12-17
Rear Shock Absorber
Rear Shock Absorber Adjustment
To suit to various riding conditions, the spring preload of
the shock absorber can be adjusted or the spring can be
replaced with an optional one. Also the damping force can
be adjusted easily so changing oil viscosity unnecessary.
Rebound Damping Adjustment
Turn the rebound damping adjuster [A] at the bottom of
the rear shock absorber with a standard tip screwdriver
until you feel a click.
If the damping feels too soft or too stiff, adjust it in accor-
dance with the following table.
NOTICE
Do not force the rebound damping adjuster beyond
the fully seated position, or the adjusting mecha-
nism may be damaged.

Seated position [A]: adjuster turned fully clockwise.


Rebound Damper Settings
Standard: 11 clicks counterclockwise [B]
Softer (Counterclockwise) [C]
Harder (Clockwise) [D]
*: Although you can turn the adjuster beyond the ad-
justable range, effecting no changes to damping
force, use it within the adjustable range.

NOTE
Adjustment of the rebound damping adjuster for the rear
suspension will slightly affect the compression damping
force. Always make any damping adjustments in small
steps and test their effects before using them in com-
petition.
Compression Damping Adjustment (Gas
Reservoir)
Turn the compression damping adjuster [A] on the gas
reservoir with a standard tip screwdriver until you feel a
click.
If the damping feels too soft or too stiff, adjust it in accor-
dance with the following table.
NOTICE
Do not force the compression damping adjuster
beyond the fully seated position, or the adjusting
mechanism may be damaged.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


12-18 SUSPENSION
Rear Shock Absorber
Seated position [A]: adjuster turned fully clockwise.
Compression Damper Settings
Standard:
KX85C 10 clicks counterclockwise [B]
KX85D/KX100F 14 clicks counterclockwise [C]
Softer (Counterclockwise) [D]
Harder (Clockwise) [E]
*: Although you can turn the adjuster beyond the ad-
justable range, effecting no changes to damping
force, use it within the adjustable range.

NOTE
Adjustment of the compression damping adjuster for the
rear suspension will slightly affect the rebound damping
force. Always make any damping adjustments in small
steps and test their effects before using them in com-
petition.
Spring Preload Adjustment
Remove:
Seat (see Seat Removal in the Frame chapter)
Side Covers (see Side Cover Removal in the Frame
chapter)
Rear Fender (see Rear Fender Removal in the Frame
chapter)
Rear Flap (see Rear Flap Removal in the Frame chap-
ter)
Rear Frame Pipe (see Rear Frame Pipe Removal in the
Frame chapter)
Muffler (see Muffler Removal in the Engine Top End
chapter)
Air Cleaner Case with Air Cleaner Duct (see Air Cleaner
Housing Removal in the Fuel System chapter)
Stuff a clean cloth into the carburetor opening to prevent
dust or dirt from entering the carburetor.
Place the jack under the frame so that the rear wheel is
raised off the ground.
Special Tools - Jack: 57001-1238
Jack Attachment: 57001-1608

Using the hook wrenches (R35, R37.5), loosen the rear


shock absorber spring locknut [A].
Special Tools - Hook Wrench R=35 [B]: 57001-1580
Hook Wrench R37.5, R42 [C] : 57001-1101

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


SUSPENSION 12-19
Rear Shock Absorber

Using the hook wrench (R37.5) [A], turn the spring preload
adjusting nut [B] as required. Turning the adjusting nut
downward makes the spring action harder and upward
softer.
Special Tool - Hook Wrench R37.5, R42: 57001-1101

Spring Preload Setting Position


(The length [A] between the Center of Upper Rear
Shock Absorber Pivot [B] and Spring End [C])
Standard: 67.5 mm (2.66 in.)
Usable Range: 63 81 mm (2.5 3.2 in.)

Tighten the rear shock absorber spring locknut.


down to makethe
After making adjustment, move the spring up and
sure that it is properly seated.
Install the removed parts (see appropriate chapters).
Rear Shock Absorber Spring Tension Inspection
Since the spring becomes shorter as it weakens, check
its free length [A] to determine its condition.
Rear Shock Spring Free Length
Standard: 256 mm (10.1 in.)
Service Limit: 251 mm (9.88 in.)
If the free length falls below the service limit, replace the
spring.

Rear Shock Absorber Removal


Pull the hoses [A] upward not to be damaged by rear
shock absorber removing.

Remove the right side cover (see Side Cover Removal in


the Frame chapter).
Place the jack under the frame so that the rear wheel is
raised off the ground.
Special Tools - Jack: 57001-1238
Jack Attachment: 57001-1608

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


12-20 SUSPENSION
Rear Shock Absorber

Remove:
Rear Tie-Rod Mounting Bolt and Nut [A]
Rear Master Cylinder Mounting Bolts [B]
Support the rocker arm [C] to slide out the tie-rod bolts.

NOTICE
When pulling out the mounting bolts, lift the rear
wheel slightly. Forcing or tapping on a bolt could
damage the bolt, sleeve, and bearing.

Remove:
Rear Shock Absorber Mounting Bolt (Lower) [A]
Rear Shock Absorber Mounting Bolt (Upper) [B]

Remove the rear shock absorber [A].

Rear Shock Absorber Installation


Apply plenty of grease to the oil seals and grease seals.
Tighten:the rear shock absorber.
Install

Torque - Rear Shock Absorber Mounting Bolt (Upper): 39
Nm (4.0 kgfm, 29 ftlb)
Rear Shock Absorber Mounting Bolt (Lower): 39
Nm (4.0 kgfm, 29 ftlb)
Install the removed parts (see appropriate chapters).
Rear Shock Absorber Spring Replacement
In addition to the standard spring, heavy and light springs
are available. If the standard spring is improper for your
purpose, select a proper one according to the riders weight
or course conditions.
Remove the rear shock absorber (see Rear Shock Ab-
sorber Removal).
Clean the threaded portion on the upper of the rear shock
absorber.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


SUSPENSION 12-21
Rear Shock Absorber

Hold the upper end of the rear shock absorber in a vise


with soft jaws [A] or a heavy cloth.
Using the hook wrenches (R35, R37.5), Loosen the lock-
nut and turn the adjusting nut all way up.
Special Tools - Hook Wrench R=35: 57001-1580
Hook Wrench R37.5, R42: 57001-1101
Using
[C].
the Spring Compressor [B], compress the spring

Special Tool - Spring Compressor: 57001-1087

Slide the damper [A].


sorber andtheliftspring
Remove retainer clip [B] from the shock ab-
off the spring [C].
Remove the rear shock absorber from the vise.

Exchange the spring for an optional part.


Install the spring so that large diameter end [A] faces up-
ward.
Replace the circlip with a new one.
Install the spring seat and new circlip.
Adjust the spring preload (see Spring Preload Adjust-
ment).
Install the rear shock absorber (see Rear Shock Absorber
Installation).
Install the removed parts (see appropriate chapters).
Rear Shock Absorber Disassembly (Oil Change)
Refer to the Rear Shock Absorber Oil Change in the Pe-
riodic Maintenance chapter.
Rear Shock Absorber Assembly
Refer to the Rear Shock Absorber Oil Change in the Pe-
riodic Maintenance chapter.
Rear Shock Absorber Inspection
Remove the rear shock absorber (see Rear Shock Ab-
sorber Removal).
Visually inspect the following items.
Oil Leakage
Crack or Dent
If there is any damage to the rear shock absorber, replace
it.
Visually inspect the oil seal [A].
If it show any signs of damage, replace it.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


12-22 SUSPENSION
Rear Shock Absorber
Rear Shock Absorber Bearing Removal
Remove:
Oil Seals [A]
Needle Bearing [B]
Sleeve [C]

Rear Shock Absorber Bearing Installation


Replace
new ones.
the needle bearing [A] and the oil seals [B] with

Apply plenty of grease [C] to the inside of the needle bear-


ing, the sleeve [D] and the lip of the oil seals.
NOTE
Install the needle bearings so that the manufacturers
marks face out.
Install the oil seals so that the deep groove side of the
rip inward.

Install the removed parts.


[E] 4 mm (0.16 in.)
[F] View from Top
Rear Shock Absorber Scrapping
WARNING
Pressurized nitrogen may explode when heated.
The rear shock contains nitrogen gas. To avoid an
explosion, do not incinerate the rear shock body
without first releasing the nitrogen.

Remove the rear shock absorber (see Rear Shock Ab-


sorber Removal).
Insert a suitable tool into the gas reservoir cap hole [A] to
release the nitrogen gas.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


SUSPENSION 12-23
Swingarm
Swingarm Removal
Remove:
Rear Tie-Rod Mounting Bolt and Nut (see Tie-Rod Re-
moval)
Bolts [A]
Screws [B]
Chain Guide Plate [C]

Remove:
Screws [A] and Brake Hose Clamps [B]
Rear Wheel (see Rear Wheel Removal in the
Wheels/Tires chapter)
Rear Caliper (see Caliper Removal in the Brakes chap-
ter)

Put the caliper [A] on suitable stand [B] so that it does not
dangle.

Remove the rear master cylinder mounting bolts [A].


down the brake
Remove the swingarm pivot shaft [B] and nut while pulling
pedal [C].
Remove swingarm [D].
NOTICE
When pulling out the mounting bolts, lift the
swingarm slightly. Forcing or tapping on a bolt
could damage the bolt, sleeve, and bearing.

Remove the screws [A].


Remove the chain slipper [B] from the swingarm.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


12-24 SUSPENSION
Swingarm
Swingarm Installation
Apply plenty of grease to the inside of the needle bear-
ings, sleeves, and grease seals.
Apply
screws.
a non-permanent locking agent to the chain slipper

Install the chain slipper, and tighten the screws.


Swingarm
Replace with new ones:
Pivot Shaft Nut
Rear Tie-Rod Mounting Nut
Install the swingarm.
Tighten:
Torque - Swingarm Pivot Shaft Nut: 69 Nm (7.0 kgfm, 51
ftlb)
Rear Tie-Rod Mounting Nut: 59 Nm (6.0 kgfm, 44
ftlb)
Install the removed parts (see appropriate chapters).
Swingarm Bearing Removal
Remove:
Swingarm (see Swingarm Removal)
Dust Seals [A]
Grease Seals [B]
Sleeves [C]
Remove the needle bearings [D] using the bearing re-
mover.
Special Tools - Bearing Remover Shaft, 9: 57001-1265
Bearing Remover Head, 15 17: 57001
-1267

Swingarm Bearing Installation


Replace
ones.
the needle bearings and grease seals with new

Apply plenty of grease to the grease seals [A], and needle


bearings [B] [C].
NOTE
Install the needle bearings so that the manufacturers
marks face out.
Install the grease seals so that the deep groove side of
the rip inward.

Install the needle bearings, grease seals, sleeves [D] and


dust seals [E] using a suitable tool.
[F] 5.0 mm (0.2 in.)
The installation procedure is the same as the counter
side.

Drive Chain Guide, Guide Roller, Chain Slipper


Wear Inspection
Refer to the Drive Chain Guide, Guide Roller, Chain Slip-
per Wear Inspection in the Periodic Maintenance chapter.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


SUSPENSION 12-25
Swingarm
Swingarm Bearing, Sleeve Inspection
NOTICE
Do not remove the bearings for inspection. Re-
moval may damage them.

Inspect the needle bearings [A] installed in the swingarm.


The rollers in a bearings normally wear very little, and
wear is difficult to measure. Instead of measuring, visually
inspect the bearings for abrasion, discoloration, or other
damage.
If the needle bearings and sleeve show any signs of ab-
normal wear, discoloration, or damage, replace them as
a set.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


12-26 SUSPENSION
Tie-Rod, Rocker Arm
Tie-Rod Removal
Pull the hoses [A] upward not to be damaged by tie-rod
removing.
Place the jack under the frame so that the rear wheel is
raised off the ground.
Special Tools - Jack: 57001-1238
Jack Attachment: 57001-1608

Squeeze
[A].
the brake lever slowly and hold it with a band

Remove:
Rear Tie-Rod Mounting Bolt and Nut [A]
Front Tie-Rod Mounting Bolt and Nut [B]
Tie-Rod [C]
NOTICE
When pulling out the mounting bolts, lift the rear
wheel slightly. Forcing or tapping on a bolt could
damage the bolt, sleeve, and bearing.

Tie-Rod Installation
Apply plenty of grease to the inside of the needle bearings
and sleeves.
Rocker Arm Needle Bearings
Tie-Rod Needle Bearings
Install the tie-rod so that the marked side faces out.
Install the tie-rod mounting bolts from the left side.
Replace the tie-rod mounting nuts with new ones.
Tighten:
Torque - Tie-Rod Mounting Nuts: 59 Nm (6.0 kgfm, 44
ftlb)

Rocker Arm Removal


Using the jack under the frame, raise the rear wheel off
the ground.
Special Tools - Jack: 57001-1238
Jack Attachment: 57001-1608

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


SUSPENSION 12-27
Tie-Rod, Rocker Arm

Squeeze
[A].
the brake lever slowly and hold it with a band

Remove:
Tie-Rod [A] (see Tie-Rod Removal)
Rear Shock Absorber Mounting Bolt (Lower) [B]
NOTICE
When pulling out the mounting bolts, lift the rear
wheel slightly. Forcing or tapping on a bolt could
damage the bolt, sleeve, and bearing.

Remove the lower chain guide roller [A].


If the lower chain guide roller is damaged, replace it.

Remove the rocker arm pivot bolt [A] and nut and the
rocker arm [B].

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


12-28 SUSPENSION
Tie-Rod, Rocker Arm
Rocker Arm Installation
Replace with new ones:
Rocker Arm Pivot Nut
Tie-Rod Mounting Nuts
Apply plenty of grease to the inside of needle bearings
and sleeves.
Rocker Arm Needle Bearings
Tie-Rod Needle Bearings
Tighten:
Torque - Rear Shock Absorber Mounting Bolt (Upper): 39
Nm (4.0 kgfm, 29 ftlb)
Rear Shock Absorber Mounting Bolt (Lower): 39
Nm (4.0 kgfm, 29 ftlb)
Rocker Arm Pivot Nut: 83 Nm (8.5 kgfm, 61 ftlb)
Tie-Rod Mounting Nuts: 59 Nm (6.0 kgfm, 44
ftlb)
Install the removed parts (see appropriate chapters).
Rocker Arm Bearing Removal
Remove:
Tie-Rod (see Tie-Rod Removal)
Rocker Arm (see Rocker Arm Removal)
Collar [A]
Sleeves [B]
Oil Seals [C]
Grease Seals [D]
Remove the needle bearings [E], using the bearing driver
set.
Special Tool - Bearing Driver Set: 57001-1129
Remove the needle bearing [F], using a suitable tool.

Rocker Arm Bearing Installation


Replace the needle bearings, oil seals and grease seals
with new ones.
Apply plenty of grease to the oil seals, grease seals and
needle bearings.
NOTE
Install the bearings so that the marked side faces out.
Install the oil seals so that the deep groove side [A]
faces inward.
Install the grease seals so that the groove side [B] faces
outward.
[C] Inward
[D] Outward

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


SUSPENSION 12-29
Tie-Rod, Rocker Arm

Install the needle bearings [A] [B], oil seals [C] and grease
seals [D] so that their positions are as shown.
The other side is also the same procedures.
Front [E]
Right Side [F]
Left Side [G]
Rear Shock Absorber [H]
Tie-Rod [I]
Rocker Arm [J]
5.5 mm (0.2 in.) [K]
2.5 mm (0.1 in.) [L]

Needle Bearing Inspection


NOTICE
Do not remove the bearings for inspection. Re-
moval may damage them.

Inspect the needle bearings installed in the tie-rod and


rocker arm.
The needle bearing normally wear very little, and wear
is difficult to measure. Instead of measuring, visually in-
spect the bearings for abrasion, discoloration, or other
damage.
If there is any doubt as to the condition of either needle
bearing, replace the bearing and sleeve as a set.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


12-30 SUSPENSION
Uni-Trak Maintenance
Uni-Trak Linkage Inspection
Refer to the Swingarm and Uni-Trak Linkage Inspection
in the Periodic Maintenance chapter.
Tie-Rod and Rocker Arm Sleeve Wear Inspection
Pull out the sleeves [A] of the rocker arm and the tie-rod.
Measure the outside diameter of the sleeve.
Sleeve Outside Diameter
Standard:
Tie-Rod 17.989 18.000 mm (0.70823 0.70866 in.)
Rocker Arm:
Large 17.989 18.000 mm (0.70823 0.70866 in.)
Small 15.950 16.000 mm (0.62795 0.62992 in.)
Service Limit:
Tie-Rod 17.96 mm (0.7071 in.)
Rocker Arm:
Large 17.96 mm (0.7071 in.)
Small 15.92 mm (0.6268 in.)
If the sleeve is worn past the service limit, replace the
sleeve.

Tie-Rod and Rocker Arm Mounting Bolt Bend


Inspection
A bent bolt causes vibration, poor handling, and instabil-
ity.
To measure the bolt runout, remove the bolt, place it in V
blocks, and set a dial gauge to the bolt at a point halfway
between the blocks.
Turn [A] the bolt to measure the runout.
The amount of dial variation is the amount of runout.
Rocker Arm Mounting Bolt Runout
Standard: TIR 0.1 mm (0.004 in.) or less
Service Limit: TIR 0.2 mm (0.008 in.)
If runout exceeds the service limit, replace the bolt.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


STEERING 13-1

Steering
Table of Contents
Exploded View........................................................................................................................ 13-2
Special Tools .......................................................................................................................... 13-4
Steering .................................................................................................................................. 13-5
Steering Inspection ........................................................................................................... 13-5
Steering Adjustment.......................................................................................................... 13-5
Steering Stem, Stem Bearing Removal ............................................................................ 13-5
Steering Stem, Stem Bearing Installation ......................................................................... 13-7
Stem Bearing Lubrication.................................................................................................. 13-8
Stem Bearing Wear, Damage Inspection.......................................................................... 13-8
Stem Warp Inspection....................................................................................................... 13-9
Handlebars ............................................................................................................................. 13-10
Handlebar Removal .......................................................................................................... 13-10
Handlebar Installation ....................................................................................................... 13-10
Handlebar Height Adjustment ........................................................................................... 13-11
Handlebar Position Adjustment......................................................................................... 13-12

13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


13-2 STEERING
Exploded View

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


STEERING 13-3
Exploded View

Torque
No. Fastener Remarks
Nm kgfm ftlb
1 Handlebar Holder Bolts 25 2.5 18 2T, S
2 Front Fork Clamp Bolts (Upper) 20 2.0 15
3 Steering Stem Head Nut 64 6.5 47
4 Handlebar Holder Nuts 34 3.5 25 R
5 Steering Stem Nut 4.9 0.50 43 inlb
6 Front Fork Clamp Bolts (Lower) 20 2.0 15 AL
AD: Apply adhesive.
AL: Tighten the two clamp bolts alternately two times to ensure even tightening torque.
G: Apply grease.
R: Replacement Parts
S: Follow the specified tightening sequence.
2T: Apply 2-stroke oil.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


13-4 STEERING
Special Tools
Bearing Puller: Steering Stem Nut Wrench:
57001-135 57001-1100

Bearing Driver, 32: Head Pipe Outer Race Driver, 46.5:


57001-382 57001-1106

Head Pipe Outer Race Press Shaft: Head Pipe Outer Race Remover ID > 37 mm:
57001-1075 57001-1107

Steering Stem Bearing Driver Adapter, 29.7: Bearing Puller:


57001-1092 57001-1575

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


STEERING 13-5
Steering
Steering Inspection
Refer to the Steering Inspection in the Periodic Mainte-
nance chapter.
Steering Adjustment
Refer to the Steering Adjustment in the Periodic Mainte-
nance chapter.
Steering Stem, Stem Bearing Removal
Remove:
Number Plate (see Number Plate Removal in the Frame
chapter)
Brake Hose Clamp Bolt [A]
Brake Hose Clamp [B]

Pull the fuel tank breather hose [A] out.


Handlebar Holder Bolts [B]
Remove:

Handlebar Holders [C]


Handlebars [D]
Steering Stem Head Nut [E] and Washer

Remove:
Front Wheel (see Front Wheel Removal in the
Wheels/Tires chapter)
Front Fender (see Front Fender Removal in the Frame
chapter)
Front Forks (see Front Fork Removal in the Suspension
chapter)
Steering Stem Head [A]

Hold the stem base [A] by hand, and remove the steering
stem nut [B] with the steering stem nut wrench [C].
Special Tool - Steering Stem Nut Wrench: 57001-1100
Remove the steering stem [D] and stem base from the
head pipe.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


13-6 STEERING
Steering

Remove the upper stem bearing inner race (tapered roller


bearing) [A].

Drive out the bearing outer races from the head pipe.
Remove the outer races pressed into the head pipe, using
the head pipe outer race remover [A], and hammer the
head pipe outer race remover to drive it out.
Special Tool - Head Pipe Outer Race Remover ID > 37 mm:
57001-1107

NOTE
If either steering stem bearing is damaged, it is recom-
mended that both the upper and lower bearing (includ-
ing outer races) should be replaced with new ones.

Remove the lower stem bearing inner race (tapered roller


bearing) [A] with its grease seal from the stem using bear-
ing pullers.
Special Tools - Bearing Puller: 57001-135
Bearing Puller: 57001-1575
Assemble the parts of the bearing puller (Special Tool:
57001-1575).
Half-split Bases [B]
Stud Bolts [C]
Nuts [D]
Insert the each half-split base under the bottom of bearing
inner race and connect the both bases by tightening the
stud bolts and nuts.
NOTE
Tighten evenly two bases by the two stud bolts.
Assemble the parts of the bearing puller (Special Tool:
57001-135).
Stud Bolts [E]
Arm [F]
Center Bolt [G]
Adapter [H]
Turn the center bolt by a wrench and pull the bearing inner
race.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


STEERING 13-7
Steering
Steering Stem, Stem Bearing Installation
Replace the bearing outer races with new ones.
Drive the outertoraces
Apply grease the outer races.
with the special tools.into the head pipe at the same time
Special Tools - Head Pipe Outer Race Press Shaft [A]:
57001-1075
Head Pipe Outer Race Driver, 46.5 [B]:
57001-1106

Replace the inner races with new ones.


drive it onto thetostem
Apply grease the lower tapered roller bearing [A], and
with the steering stem bearing driver
[B] and adapter [C].
Special Tools - Bearing Driver, 32: 57001-382
Steering Stem Bearing Driver Adapter,
29.7: 57001-1092

Apply grease to the upper tapered roller bearing, and in-


stall it in the head pipe.
Install the stem base through the head pipe and upper
bearing, and hand-tighten the steering stem nut while
pushing up the stem base.
Install:
Steering Stem Head
Washer (with the chamfer side facing upper side)
Steering Stem Head Nut
Tighten the steering stem head nut lightly.
Settle the bearing in place as follows;
Tighten the steering stem nut to 55 Nm (5.6 kgfm, 41
ftlb) of torque (To tighten the steering stem nut to the
specified torque, hook the wrench [A] on the stem nut,
and pull the wrench at the hole by 305 Nm (31.1 kgf)
force [B] in the direction shown.).
Special Tool - Steering Stem Nut Wrench: 57001-1100
Check that there is no play and the steering stem turns
smoothly without rattles. If not, the steering stem bearings
may be damaged.
Again back out the stem nut a fraction of a turn until it
turns lightly.
Turn the stem nut lightly clockwise until it just becomes
hard to turn. Do not overtighten, or the steering will be
too tight.
Torque - Steering Stem Nut: 4.9 Nm (0.50 kgfm, 43 inlb)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


13-8 STEERING
Steering

Tighten the stem head nut temporarily.


Install the front forks (see Front Fork Installation in the
Suspension chapter).
Tighten:
Torque - Front Fork Clamp Bolts (Upper): 20 Nm (2.0
kgfm, 15 ftlb)
Steering Stem Head Nut: 64 Nm (6.5 kgfm, 47
ftlb)
Front Fork Clamp Bolts (Lower): 20 Nm (2.0
kgfm, 15 ftlb)

NOTE
Tighten the upper fork clamp bolts first, next the stem
head nut, last the lower fork clamp bolts.
Tighten the two clamp bolts (lower) alternately two times
to ensure even tightening torque.

Install the removed parts (see appropriate chapters).


WARNING
If the handlebar does not turn to the steering stop it
may cause an accident resulting in injury or death.
Be sure the cables, harnesses and hoses are routed
properly and do not interfere with handlebar move-
ment (see Cable, Wire, and Hose Routing section in
the Appendix chapter).

Check and adjust the following items.


Steering (see Steering Inspection in the Periodic Main-
tenance chapter)
Front Brake (see Brake Hoses and Connections Inspec-
tion in the Periodic Maintenance chapter)
Clutch Cable (see Clutch Operation Inspection in the Pe-
riodic Maintenance chapter)
Throttle Cable (see Throttle Grip Free Play Adjustment
in the Periodic Maintenance chapter)
Stem Bearing Lubrication
Refer to the Steering Stem Bearing Lubrication in the Pe-
riodic Maintenance chapter.
Stem Bearing Wear, Damage Inspection
Using a high flash-point solvent, wash the upper and
lower tapered rollers in the cages, and wipe the upper
and lower outer races, which are press-fitted into the
head pipe, clean off grease and dirt.
Visually inspect the outer race and the rollers.
Replace the bearing assembly if it show damage.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


STEERING 13-9
Steering
Stem Warp Inspection
Whenever the steering stem is removed, or if the steering
cannot be adjusted for smooth action, check the steering
stem shaft [A] for straightness.
If the steering stem shaft is bent, replace the steering
stem.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


13-10 STEERING
Handlebars
Handlebar Removal
Remove:
Number Plate (see Number Plate Removal in the Frame
chapter)
Clutch Lever Assembly [A]
Engine Stop Switch [B] (see Engine Stop Switch Re-
moval in the Electrical System chapter)
Bands [C]
Left Handlebar Grip [D]

Remove:
Throttle Grip Assembly [A] (see Throttle Cable Replace-
ment in the Fuel System chapter)
Front Master Cylinder [B] (see Front Master Cylinder Re-
moval in the Brakes chapter)

Pull the fuel tank breather hose [A] out.


Handlebar Holder Bolts [B]
Remove:

Handlebar Holders [C]


Handlebars [D]
Check the handlebars for bends or cracks.
If the handlebars was bended or cracked, replace it.

Handlebar Installation
Using a high flash-point solvent, clean off any oil or dirt
that may be on the adhesive cement coating area. Dry
them with a clean cloth.
Apply adhesive cement to the innermost area of the left
handlebar grip [A] and all-around inner surface of the
left handlebar grip hole entrance and also apply it to the
roulette area on the handlebars.
The left handlebar grip must be installed so that align the
convex mark [B] of left grip to the punch mark [C] of han-
dlebars.
When installing the left handlebar grip, rotate the grip
more than once first, and then remove and install the grip
alternately more than three times to spread adhesive ce-
ment. Make sure that adhesive cement has been spread
evenly.
After installation, hold the left handlebar grip area at more
than three points to make the left handlebar grip stick to
the handlebars.
Install:
Clutch Lever Assembly (see Clutch Lever Installation in
the Clutch chapter)
Engine Stop Switch (see Engine Stop Switch Installation
in the Electrical System chapter)
Bands

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


STEERING 13-11
Handlebars

Apply grease to the throttle cable upper end and clutch


cable upper end.
Apply 2-stroke oil to the edge (slash area [A]) of the han-
dlebars.

Install the throttle grip assembly so that the grip [A] is in


as far as it will go.
Position the throttle grip assembly [B] so that the punch
mark [C] on the handlebars is on the extension of the
parting line of the throttle grip assembly.
Install the front master cylinder [D] (see Front Master
Cylinder Installation in the Brakes chapter).
Insert the fuel tank breather hose into the hole of the steer-
ing shaft.

Install
follows.
the handlebars [A] on the steering stem head as

Install the handlebars and the handlebar holders [B] so


that the arrow marks [C] on the handlebar holders point
at the front.
Align the punch mark [D] on the handlebars with a gap at
rear of the handlebar holder.
Apply 2-stroke oil to the thread of the handlebar holder
bolts.
Tighten the front handlebar holder bolts [E] first and then
the rear ones [F]. If the handlebar holders are correctly
installed, there will be no gap at the front and a gap [G] at
the rear after tightening.
Tighten:
Torque - Handlebar Holder Bolts: 25 Nm (2.5 kgfm, 18
ftlb)
Install:
Number Plate (see Number Plate Installation in the
Frame chapter)
Check the front brake for the proper brake effect, or no
brake drag.
Handlebar Height Adjustment
The handlebar height can be adjusted in the two positions
(5 mm (0.2 in.) or 10 mm (0.4 in.) higher than standard
setting).

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


13-12 STEERING
Handlebars

Remove:
Handlebars (see Handlebar Removal)
Handlebar Holder Nuts [A] and Washers
Handlebar Holders [B]

Select the handlebar height as follows.


[A] 5 mm (0.2 in.) Higher than Standard Setting
[B] 10 mm (0.4 in.) Higher than Standard Setting
Install the collars [C] between the handlebar holders [D]
and steering stem head [E].

Replace the handlebar holder nuts with new ones.


and washers.
Install the handlebar holders, the handlebar holder nuts

Tighten:
Torque - Handlebar Holder Nuts: 34 Nm (3.5 kgfm, 25 ftlb)
Install the handlebars (see Handlebar Installation).
Handlebar Position Adjustment
To suit various riding positions, the handlebar position can
be adjusted by turning the handlebar holders around.

Remove:
Handlebars (see Handlebar Removal)
Handlebar Holder Nuts [A] and Washers
Handlebar Holders [B]

Turn the handlebar holders 180.


Replacehandlebars
Put the on the handlebar holders.
Install thethehandlebar
handlebar holder nuts with new ones.
washers. holders, handlebar holder nuts and

Tighten:
Torque - Handlebar Holder Nuts: 34 Nm (3.5 kgfm, 25 ftlb)
Install the handlebars (see Handlebar Installation).

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


FRAME 14-1

Frame
Table of Contents
Exploded View........................................................................................................................ 14-2
Frame ..................................................................................................................................... 14-4
Frame Inspection .............................................................................................................. 14-4
Rear Frame Pipe Removal ............................................................................................... 14-4
Rear Frame Pipe Installation ............................................................................................ 14-4
Seat ........................................................................................................................................ 14-5
Seat Removal ................................................................................................................... 14-5
Seat Installation ................................................................................................................ 14-5
Side Covers ............................................................................................................................ 14-6
Side Cover Removal/Installation....................................................................................... 14-6
Shroud .................................................................................................................................... 14-7
Shroud Removal/Installation ............................................................................................. 14-7
Number Plate.......................................................................................................................... 14-8
Number Plate Removal..................................................................................................... 14-8
Number Plate Installation.................................................................................................. 14-8
Fender .................................................................................................................................... 14-9
Front Fender Removal/Installation.................................................................................... 14-9
Rear Fender Removal/Installation .................................................................................... 14-9
Rear Frap Removal/Installation ........................................................................................ 14-9
Footpegs................................................................................................................................. 14-10
Footpeg Removal.............................................................................................................. 14-10
Footpeg Installation........................................................................................................... 14-10

14

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


14-2 FRAME
Exploded View

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


FRAME 14-3
Exploded View

Torque
No. Fastener Remarks
Nm kgfm ftlb
1 Rear Frame Pipe Nuts 34 3.5 25 R
G: Apply grease.
R: Replacement Parts

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


14-4 FRAME
Frame
Frame Inspection
Refer to the Frame Inspection in the Periodic Mainte-
nance chapter.
Rear Frame Pipe Removal
Remove:
Right Side Cover (see Side Cover Removal/Installation)
Bolt [A]
Rear Frame Pipe Bolts [B] and Nuts
Rear Frame Pipe [C]

Rear Frame Pipe Installation


Installation is the reverse of removal.
Replace the rear frame pipe nuts with new ones.
Tighten:
Torque - Rear Frame Pipe Nuts: 34 Nm (3.5 kgfm, 25 ftlb)
Install the right side cover (see Side Cover Removal/In-
stallation).

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


FRAME 14-5
Seat
Seat Removal
Remove the seat bolt [A] on both sides.
Remove the seat [B] rearward [C].

Seat Installation
Install the seat.
Insert the hooks [A] of the seat [B] under the flange collar
[C] and bracket [D].
Take care not to damage the side covers with the bracket
of seat.
Install the seat bolts on both sides.
Pull up the rear end of the seat to make sure it is securely
installed.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


14-6 FRAME
Side Covers
Side Cover Removal/Installation
Remove:
Seat Bolt [A]
Side Cover Bolt [B]
Side Cover [C]
Installation is the reverse of removal.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


FRAME 14-7
Shroud
Shroud Removal/Installation
Remove:
Bolts [A]
Shroud [B]
Installation is the reverse of removal.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


14-8 FRAME
Number Plate
Number Plate Removal
Unlock the clamp [A] of the number plate [B].
Clear thethe
Remove number plate mounting bolt [C].
projections [D] and remove the number plate.

Number Plate Installation


Install the number plate [A] so that the projections [B] on
the front fender [C] fit into the holes [D] in the number
plate.
Run the brake hose through the front of the number plate.
Tighten the number plate mounting bolt.
Lock the clamp of the number plate.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


FRAME 14-9
Fender
Front Fender Removal/Installation
Remove the number plate (see Number Plate Removal).
Installationtheisbolts
Remove [A] and the front fender [B].
Install the number plate (see
the reverse of removal.
Number Plate Installation).

Rear Fender Removal/Installation


Remove the side covers (see Side Cover Removal).
Remove:
Nuts [A], Washers and Bolts
Bolts [B]
Rear Fender [C]
Installation is the reverse of removal.
Replace the rear fender mounting nuts with new ones.

Rear Frap Removal/Installation


Remove:
Bolts [A] and Collars
Rear Flap [B]
Installation is the reverse of removal.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


14-10 FRAME
Footpegs
Footpeg Removal
Remove:
Cotter Pin [A]
Washer [B]
Pivot Pin [C]
Spring [D]
Footpeg [E]

Footpeg Installation
Replace the cotter pin with a new one.
Install the footpeg,
Apply grease to the pivot pin.
Insert the pivot pin spring and pivot pin.
from upper side.
Install the washer and new cotter pin.
Bend the longer side [A] of the cotter pin.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 15-1

Electrical System
Table of Contents
Exploded View........................................................................................................................ 15-2
Specifications ......................................................................................................................... 15-4
Special Tools and Sealant ...................................................................................................... 15-5
Wiring Diagram....................................................................................................................... 15-6
Precautions............................................................................................................................. 15-7
Electrical Wiring...................................................................................................................... 15-8
Wiring Inspection .............................................................................................................. 15-8
Flywheel Magneto .................................................................................................................. 15-9
Magneto Cover Removal .................................................................................................. 15-9
Magneto Cover Installation ............................................................................................... 15-9
Flywheel Magneto Removal.............................................................................................. 15-9
Flywheel Magneto Installation........................................................................................... 15-10
Flywheel Magneto Inspection ........................................................................................... 15-11
Ignition Timing ........................................................................................................................ 15-13
Ignition Timing Adjustment................................................................................................ 15-13
Ignition System ....................................................................................................................... 15-14
Safety Instructions ............................................................................................................ 15-14
Crankshaft Sensor Removal/Installation........................................................................... 15-14
Crankshaft Sensor Air Gap Adjustment ............................................................................ 15-14
Crankshaft Sensor Inspection........................................................................................... 15-14
Crankshaft Sensor Peak Voltage Inspection..................................................................... 15-15
Ignition Coil Removal ........................................................................................................ 15-15
Ignition Coil Installation ..................................................................................................... 15-16
Ignition Coil Inspection...................................................................................................... 15-16
Spark Plug Cleaning and Inspection................................................................................. 15-17
Spark Plug Gap Inspection ............................................................................................... 15-17
Ignition Coil Primary Peak Voltage Check ........................................................................ 15-18
Engine Stop Switch System Check................................................................................... 15-18
Switches ................................................................................................................................. 15-20
Engine Stop Switch Inspection ......................................................................................... 15-20 15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


15-2 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Exploded View

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 15-3
Exploded View

Torque
No. Fastener Remarks
Nm kgfm ftlb
1 Spark Plug 25.5 2.60 18.8 inlb
2 Stator Coil Plate Mounting Screws 5.2 0.53 46 inlb
3 Flywheel Nut 29 3.0 21
R: Replacement Parts

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


15-4 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Specifications

Item Standard
Flywheel Magneto
Magneto Output Voltage 65 V or more at 4 000 r/min (rpm)
Stator Coil Resistance 282 423 at 20C (68F)
Ignition System
Ignition Coil:
3 Needle Arcing Distance 7 mm (0.28 in.) or more
Primary Winding Resistance 0.36 0.48 at 20C (68F)
Secondary Winding Resistance 5.4 7.4 k at 20C (68F)
Primary Peak Voltage 150 V or more
Crankshaft Sensor Resistance 408 612 at 20C (68F)
Crankshaft Sensor Peak Voltage 4.0 V or more
Spark Plug:
Standard:
Type NGK R6252K-105
Gap 0.7 0.8 mm (0.028 0.031 in.)
Option:
Type NGK BR9EVX
Gap 0.6 0.7 mm (0.024 0.028 in.)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 15-5
Special Tools and Sealant
Flywheel Puller, M27 1.0: LH: Flywheel & Pulley Holder:
57001-252 57001-1605

Peak Voltage Adapter: Liquid Gasket, TB1211:


57001-1415 56019-120

Needle Adapter Set:


57001-1457

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


15-6 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 15-7
Precautions
There are numbers of important precautions that are
musts when servicing electrical systems. Learn and ob-
serve all the rules below.
The electrical parts should never be struck sharply, as
with a hammer, or allowed to fall on a hard surface. Such
a shock to the parts can damage them.
To prevent damage to electrical parts, do not disconnect
any electrical connections while the engine is running.
Troubles may involve one or in some cases all items.
Never replace a defective part without determining what
CAUSED the failure. If the failure was caused by some
other item or items, they too must be repaired or replaced,
or the new replacement will soon fail again.
Make sure all connectors in the circuit are clean and tight,
and examine leads for signs of burning, fraying, etc. Poor
leads and bad connections will affect electrical system
operation.
Measure coil and winding resistance when the part is cold
(at room temperature).

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


15-8 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Electrical Wiring
Wiring Inspection
Visually
etc.
inspect the wiring for signs of burning, fraying,

If any wiring is poor, replace the stator coil.


Pull each connector [A] apart and inspect it for corrosion,
dirt, and damage.
If the connector is corroded or dirty, clean it carefully. If it
is damaged, replace stator coil.
Check the wiring for continuity.
Use the wiring diagram to find the ends of the lead which
is suspected of being a problem.
Connect a tester between the ends of the leads.
If the tester does not read about 0 , the lead is defective.
Replace the stator coil if necessary.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 15-9
Flywheel Magneto
Magneto Cover Removal
Free the carburetor overflow hose [A] from the clamp [B]
on the magneto cover.
Remove:
Magneto Cover Bolts [C]
Magneto Cover [D]
Gasket

Magneto Cover Installation


Replace the gasket with a new one.
Install:
Magneto Cover [A]
Magneto Cover Bolts [B]
Run the carburetor overflow hose correctly (see Cable,
Wire, and Hose Routing section in the Appendix chapter).

Flywheel Magneto Removal


Remove the fuel tank (see Fuel Tank Removal in the Fuel
System chapter ).
Remove the bolt [A] to disconnect the ground terminal.

Remove the bands [A].


Ignition Coil Primary Lead Connector [B]
Disconnect:

Crankshaft Sensor Lead Connector [C]


CDI Unit Lead Connector [D]

Open the Clamp [A].

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


15-10 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Flywheel Magneto

Remove
moval)
the magneto cover (see Magneto Cover Re-

Holding the flywheel with the flywheel & pulley holder [A]
and remove the flywheel nut [B].
Special Tool - Flywheel & Pulley Holder: 57001-1605

Screw the flywheel puller [A] into the flywheel by turning


it counterclockwise (left-hand thread).
Special Tool - Flywheel Puller, M27 1.0: LH: 57001-252
Remove the flywheel from the crankshaft by turning in
the puller center bolt [B] and tapping the head of the
bolt lightly with a hammer, while holding the puller body
steady. There is a woodruff key in the crankshaft tapered
portion.
NOTICE
Never strike the grab bar or the flywheel itself. Strik-
ing the bar can bond it. If the flywheel is struck, the
magnets may lose their magnetism.

Remove the stator coil plate mounting screws [A], and


remove the stator coil plate [B] with crankshaft sensor and
the wiring grommet [C].

Flywheel Magneto Installation


Install the stator coil plate [A] with crankshaft sensor (see
Flywheel Magneto Adjustment).
Torque - Stator Coil Plate Mounting Screws [B]: 5.2 Nm
(0.53 kgfm, 46 inlb)
Set the stator wiring grommet [C] securely in the notch in
the left crankcase half, and route the wires according to
the Cable, Wire, and Hose Routing section in the Appen-
dix chapter.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 15-11
Flywheel Magneto

Using a high flash-point solvent, clean off any oil or dirt


that may be on the crankshaft taper [A] and the flywheel
taper [B]. Dry them with a clean cloth.
Fit the woodruff key [C] securely in the slot in the crank-
shaft, and install the flywheel.
Holding the flywheel with the flywheel & pulley holder and
tighten the flywheel nut to the specified torque.
Special Tool - Flywheel & Pulley Holder: 57001-1605
Torque - Flywheel Nut: 29 Nm (3.0 kgfm, 21 ftlb)

Measure the crankshaft sensor air gap (see Crankshaft


Sensor Air Gap Adjustment).
Install the removed parts (see appropriate chapters).
Run the leads according to the Cable, Wire, and Hose
Routing section in the Appendix chapter.
Flywheel Magneto Inspection
There are three types of magneto problems: short, open
(wire burned out), or loss in flywheel magnetism. A short
or open in one of the coil wires will result in either a low
output, or no output at all. A loss in flywheel magnetism,
which may be caused by dropping or hitting the flywheel,
or just by aging, will result in low output.
Magneto Output Voltage Check
Check the magneto output voltage, do the following pro-
cedures.
Remove the left shroud (see Shroud Removal/Installation
in the Frame chapter).
Remove the CDI unit [A].
Do not disconnect the CDI unit connector [B].
Connect the digital meter [C] with the needle adapter set
as shown in the table.
Start the engine.
WARNING
To avoid a serious burn, never touch the hot expan-
sion chamber or engine during inspection.
Run it at the rpm given in the table.
Note the voltage readings.
Special Tool - Needle Adapter Set: 57001-1457
After measurement, remove the needle adapters and ap-
ply sealant to the seals of the connector for waterproofing.
Sealant - Liquid Gasket, TB1211: 56019-120

Magneto Output Voltage at 4 000 r/min (rpm)


Connections
Reading
Meter (+) to Meter () to
BK/W BK/R AC65 V or more
If the output voltage shows the value in the table, the mag-
neto operates properly.
If the output voltage shows a much lower reading than that
given in the table indicates that the magneto is defective.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


15-12 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Flywheel Magneto
Stator Coil Check
Check the stator coil resistance as follows.
Disconnect the CDI unit lead connector [A].
Connect the digital meter [B] as shown in the table.
Stator Coil Resistance at 20 C (68 F)
Connections
Reading
Meter (+) Meter () to
BK/W BK/R 282 423
If there is more resistance than shown in the table or no
meter reading the stator has an open lead and must be re-
placed. A much lower reading than this resistance means
that the stator coil is shorted, and must be replaced.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 15-13
Ignition Timing
Ignition Timing Adjustment
Remove
moval).
the magneto cover (see Magneto Cover Re-

Check to see if the middle mark [A] of the three-marks on


the stator coil plate [B] is aligned with the straight surface
[C] of the projection on the crankcase.

If the marks are not aligned, loosen the stator coil plate
mounting screws [A] and turn the stator coil plate [B].

The ignition timing can be adjusted to change the power


band to suit the riders preference or ability.
Ifplate
necessary, adjust the timing by shifting the stator coil
position within the three-marks [A].

NOTE
For best engine performance, it is very important to ad-
just the ignition timing within the adjustable range just
explained.
Crankshaft Rotation [A]
Stator Rotation [B]
Retard [C]
Advance [D]

Tighten the stator coil plate mounting screws to the spec-


ified torque.
Torque - Stator Coil Plate Mounting Screw: 5.2 Nm (0.53
kgfm, 46 inlb)
Install
tion).
the magneto cover (see Magneto Cover Installa-

Test ride the motorcycle and readjust the ignition timing if


necessary.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


15-14 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Ignition System
Safety Instructions
WARNING
The ignition system produces extremely high volt-
age. Do not touch the spark plug, ignition coil or ig-
nition coil lead while the engine is running, or you
could receive a severe electrical shock.

Crankshaft Sensor Removal/Installation


Remove
Removal).
the crankshaft sensor (see Flywheel Magneto

Installation is the reverse of removal.


between the flywheelsensor
Install the crankshaft so that the air gap (clearance
and the crankshaft sensor core) has
correct clearance (see Flywheel Magneto Installation).
Crankshaft Sensor Air Gap Adjustment
Remove
moval).
the magneto cover (see Magneto Cover Re-

Loosen the crankshaft sensor screws [A].


the crankshaft
Insert a 0.5 mm (0.02 in.) thickness gauge [B] between
sensor [C] core and the timing plate [D].
While pressing the crankshaft sensor toward the mag-
neto flywheel, tighten the crankshaft sensor screws and
remove the thickness gauge.
Check the air gap.
Crankshaft Sensor Air Gap: 0.4 0.6 mm (0.016 0.024
in.)
If the air gap is not within the specified range, readjust the
gap.
Crankshaft Sensor Inspection
Remove:
Left Shroud (see Shroud Removal/Installation in the
Frame chapter)
CDI Unit Lead Connector
Connect a digital meter [A] to the White/Green and
White/Red leads in the CDI unit connector [B].
Crankshaft Sensor Resistance
W/G W/R Leads: 408 612
If there is more resistance than the specified value, the
coil has an open lead and must be replaced. Much less
than this resistance means the coil is shorted, and must
be replaced.
Using the digital meter, measure the resistance between
the crankshaft sensor leads and chassis ground.
Any digital meter reading less than infinity indicates a
short, necessitating replacement of the stator coil plate.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 15-15
Ignition System
Crankshaft Sensor Peak Voltage Inspection
Remove the left shroud (see Shroud Removal/Installation
in the Frame chapter).
Disconnect the CDI unit lead connector [A].
[C].
Connect the peak voltage adapter [B] to the digital meter

Connect the black lead of the adapter to White/Green


lead and red lead to White/Red lead of the magneto lead
adapter.
Crank the engine by kicking the pedal several times to
measure the peak voltage of the crankshaft sensor.
Crankshaft Sensor Peak Voltage
Standard: 4.0 V or more

Special Tool - Peak Voltage Adapter: 57001-1415


Type: KEK-54-9-B

WARNING
Electrical equipment can cause serious electrical
shock. To avoid being shocked, do not touch the
metal portion of the probe when measuring voltage.
If the voltage is less than the specified, check the crank-
shaft sensor (see Crankshaft Sensor Inspection).
Ignition Coil Removal
Remove the fuel tank (see Fuel Tank Removal in the Fuel
System chapter).
Disconnect the primary lead connector [A].
Pull off the spark plug cap [B].

Remove the bolts [A] and ignition coil [B].

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


15-16 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Ignition System
Ignition Coil Installation
Install the ignition coil [A].
terminalthe
Tighten bolts [B] together with the ignition coil ground
[C] and CDI unit ground terminal [D].
Run the leads correctly (see Cable, Wire, and Hose Rout-
ing section in the Appendix chapter).

Install
45 [B]
the spark plug cap [A] as shown.

Front [C]
Connect the primary lead connector.
Pull up the spark plug cap lightly to make sure of the in-
stallation of the spark plug cap.

Ignition Coil Inspection


Measuring Arcing Distance
The most accurate test for determining the condition of
the ignition coil is made by measuring arcing distance using
the coil tester for the 3-needle method.
Remove the ignition coil (see Ignition Coil Removal).
Measure the arcing distance using the coil tester [A].
Connect the ignition coil (with the spark plug cap left in-
stalled on the spark plug lead) [B] to the tester and mea-
sure the arcing distance.
WARNING
To avoid extremely high voltage shocks, do not
touch the coil or lead.
If the distance reading is less than the specified value, the
ignition coil or spark plug cap is defective.
3 Needle Arcing Distance
Standard: 7 mm (0.28 in.) or more

To determine which part is defective, measure the arcing


distance again with the spark plug cap removed from the
spark plug lead.
If the arcing distance is subnormal as before, the trouble
is with the ignition coil itself. If the arcing distance is now
normal, the trouble is with the spark plug cap.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 15-17
Ignition System
Measuring Coil Resistance
If the arcing tester is not available, the coil can be checked
for a broken or badly shorted winding with a digital meter.
However, the digital meter cannot detect layer shorts and
shorts resulting from insulation breakdown under high volt-
age.
Remove the ignition coil (see Ignition Coil Removal).
Measure the primary winding resistance [A] as follows.
Connect the digital meter between the coil terminals.
Measure the secondary winding resistance [B] as follows.
Remove the spark plug cap from the spark plug lead.
Connect the digital meter between the spark plug lead
and the ground lead terminal.
Ignition Coil Winding Resistance
Primary Windings: 0.36 0.48 at 20C (68F)
Secondary Windings: 5.4 7.4 k at 20C (68F)
If the digital meter does not read as specified, replace the
ignition coil.
If the digital meter reads as specified, the ignition coil
windings are probably good. However, if the ignition sys-
tem still does not perform as it should after all other com-
ponents have been checked, test replace the coil with one
known to be good.
Check the spark plug lead for visible damage.
If the spark plug lead is damaged, replace the ignition coil.
Spark Plug Cleaning and Inspection
Refer to the Spark Plug Cleaning and Inspection in the
Periodic Maintenance chapter.
Spark Plug Gap Inspection
Refer to the Spark Plug Cleaning and Inspection in the
Periodic Maintenance chapter.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


15-18 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Ignition System
Ignition Coil Primary Peak Voltage Check
Remove the spark plug cap from the spark plug, but do
not remove the spark plug.
Install the good spark plug [A] to the spark plug cap, then
touch the frame with it.
NOTE
Measure the voltage with each lead connected cor-
rectly. The correct value may not be obtained if
disconnected.
Maintain the correct value of compression pressure for
the cylinder (Be sure to measure the voltage with the
spark plug installed to the cylinder head.).

Connect the peak voltage adapter [B] to the digital meter.


Special Tools - Peak Voltage Adapter: 57001-1415
Type: KEK-54-9-B
Needle Adapter Set: 57001-1457
Connect the peak voltage adapter to the ignition coil ter-
minal [C] and ground [D].
Connections:
Peak Voltage Digital
Adapter Meter
Terminal (O
R lead (+)
Lead)
Ground BK lead ()
Ignition Coil [E]
CDI Unit [F]
Needle Adapter [G]

Shift the gear to the neutral position.


measurethetheengine
Crank by kicking the pedal several times to
peak voltage of the ignition coil.
Ignition Coil Primary Peak Voltage
Standard: 150 V or more

WARNING
Electrical equipment can cause serious electrical
shock. To avoid being shocked, do not touch the
metal portion of the probe when measuring voltage.
If the voltage is less than the specified value, see the
Troubleshooting.
Engine Stop Switch System Check
Start the engine.
If the engine
Push the engine stop switch [A], stop the engine.
does not stop, check the engine stop switch
for continuity (see Engine Stop Switch Inspection).
If the engine stop switch is good, check the wiring (see
Wiring Inspection).
If the wiring is good, replace the CDI unit.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 15-19
Ignition System

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


15-20 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Switches
Engine Stop Switch Inspection
Using a tester, check to see that the connections shown
in the table have continuity (about zero ohms).
If the switch has an open or short, replace it with a new
one.
Engine Stop Switch Connection

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


APPENDIX 16-1

Appendix
Table of Contents
Cable, Wire, and Hose Routing .............................................................................................. 16-2
Troubleshooting Guide ........................................................................................................... 16-12

16

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


16-2 APPENDIX
Cable, Wire, and Hose Routing

1. Throttle Cable
2. Clutch Cable
3. Engine Stop Switch
4. Engine Stop Switch Lead
5. Bands (Hold the engine stop switch lead.)
6. Steering Stem Head Bracket
7. Run the engine stop switch lead to the left side of the steering stem head bracket.
8. Clamp
9. Front Brake Hose (Run the front brake hose to the outside of the number plate.)
10. Run the clutch cable to the inside of the number plate.
Run the clutch cable to the right side of the steering stem head bracket.
11. Run the throttle cable to the inside of the number plate.
Run the throttle cable to the left side of the steering stem head bracket.
Run the throttle cable to the outside of the engine stop switch lead.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


APPENDIX 16-3
Cable, Wire, and Hose Routing

1. Band (Hold the throttle cable to the lower side of the frame, and front side of the damper.)
2. Damper
3. Throttle Cable
4. Engine Stop Switch Lead
5. Clamp (Hold the throttle cable and engine stop switch lead.)
6. Radiator Mounting Bolts
7. Clamp (Hold the clutch cable.)
8. Clutch Cable
9. Run the clutch cable between the radiator mounting bolts.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


16-4 APPENDIX
Cable, Wire, and Hose Routing

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


APPENDIX 16-5
Cable, Wire, and Hose Routing
1. CDI Unit
2. Band (Hold the throttle cable to the lower side of the frame, and front side of the damper.)
3. Engine Stop Switch Lead Connector
4. Radiator Overflow Hose
5. Primary Lead Connector
6. Band (Hold the primary lead to the lower side of the frame.)
7. Dampers
8. Band (Hold the CDI unit lead to the upper side of the frame.)
9. Band (Hold the CDI unit lead to the lower side of the frame.)
10. Spark Plug Cap
11. Throttle Cable
12. Ignition Coil Ground
13. Ignition Coil
14. Ignition Coil Lead
15. CDI Unit Ground
16. Viewed A
17. 45

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


16-6 APPENDIX
Cable, Wire, and Hose Routing

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


APPENDIX 16-7
Cable, Wire, and Hose Routing
1. Air Vent Hose
2. Do not cross the air vent hose and magneto lead.
3. Magneto Lead
4. Install the fuel hose so that paint mark faces right side.
5. Fuel Hose
6. Run the fuel hose to the outside of the air vent hose.
7. Viewed A
8. Clamp (Hold the magneto lead.)
9. Hold the carburetor overflow hose to the clamp on the magneto cover.
10. Carburetor Overflow Hose
11. Clamp (Hold the air vent hoses and carburetor overflow hose.)
12. Breather Hose
13. Run the carburetor overflow hoses, air vent hose and breather hose to the outside of the tie-rod.
14. Tie-Rod

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


16-8 APPENDIX
Cable, Wire, and Hose Routing

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


APPENDIX 16-9
Cable, Wire, and Hose Routing
1. Radiator Overflow Hose
2. Run the radiator overflow hose and breather hose between the engine brackets.
3. Band (Hold the radiator overflow hose and breather hose to the frame.)
4. Frame
5. Breather Hose
6. Run the radiator overflow hose between the engine brackets.
7. Install the water hoses so that paint mark faces right side.
8. Viewed A
9. Cylinder
10. Viewed B
11. Do not bend tightly the radiator overflow hose.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


16-10 APPENDIX
Cable, Wire, and Hose Routing

1. Touch the front brake hose fitting to the stopper.


2. Brake Hose
3. Clamp
4. Clamps
5. Viewed A

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


APPENDIX 16-11
Cable, Wire, and Hose Routing

1. Touch the rear brake hose fitting to the stopper.


2. Brake Hose
3. Clamps
4. Cotter Pin

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


16-12 APPENDIX
Troubleshooting Guide
NOTE Piston ring bad (worn, weak, broken, or
This is not an exhaustive list, giving every sticking)
possible cause for each problem listed. It Piston ring/groove clearance excessive
is meant simply as a rough guide to assist Cylinder head gasket damaged
the troubleshooting for some of the more Cylinder head warped
common difficulties. Cylinder base gasket damaged
Read valve damaged
Engine Doesnt Start, Starting
Cylinder nut loose
Difficulty:
Engine wont turn over:
Cylinder, piston seizure Poor Running at Low Speed:
Crankshaft seizure Spark weak:
Connecting rod small end seizure Spark plug dirty, broken, or gap malad-
Connecting rod big end seizure justed
Transmission gear or bearing seizure Spark plug cap or ignition coil lead trouble
Kick shaft return spring broken Spark plug cap shorted or not in good con-
Kick ratchet gear not engaging tact
No fuel flow: Spark plug incorrect heat value
No fuel in tank CDI unit trouble
Fuel tap turned off Crankshaft sensor broken or maladjusted
Tank cap air vent obstructed Ignition coil trouble
Fuel tap clogged Flywheel magneto damaged
Fuel line clogged Ignition coil lead or CDI unit lead not in good
Float valve clogged contact
Engine flooded: Fuel/air mixture incorrect:
Fuel level too high Air screw and/or idle adjusting screw mal-
Float valve worn or stuck open adjusted
Starting technique faulty Slow jet or air passage clogged
(when flooded, kick with the throttle fully Air cleaner clogged, poorly sealed, or miss-
open to allow more air to reach the en- ing
gine.) Choke plunger stuck open
No spark; spark weak: Fuel level too high or too low
Spark plug dirty, broken, or gap malad- Fuel tank air vent obstructed
justed Carburetor holder loose
Spark plug cap or high tension wiring trou- Air cleaner duct loose
ble Crankshaft oil seal deteriorated or dam-
Spark plug cap shorted or not in good con- aged
tact Compression Low:
Spark plug incorrect heat value Spark plug loose
CDI unit trouble Cylinder head not sufficiently tightened
Ignition coil trouble down
Ignition coil resistor open Cylinder, piston worn
Flywheel magneto damaged Piston ring bad (worn, weak, broken, or
Wiring shorted or open sticking)
Fuel/air mixture incorrect: Piston ring/groove clearance excessive
Air screw and/or idle adjusting screw mal- Cylinder head gasket damaged
adjusted Cylinder head warped
Slow jet or air passage clogged Cylinder base gasket damaged
Air cleaner clogged, poorly sealed, or miss- Reed valve damaged
ing Cylinder nut loose
Starter jet clogged KIPS ports stuck open:
Compression Low: KIPS exhaust valve stuck open (valve
Spark plug loose seizure, or carbon accumulation)
Cylinder head not sufficiently tightened KIPS exhaust valves assembled incorrectly
down Exhaust advancer spring damaged
Cylinder, piston worn Exhaust valve operating rod seizure
Rod (for KIPS) seized in cylinder

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


APPENDIX 16-13
Troubleshooting Guide
Other: Fuel level too high or too low
CDI unit trouble Main jet clogged
Transmission oil viscosity too high Throttle valve does not fully open
Brake dragging Air cleaner clogged
Drive train trouble Muffler clogged
Engine overheating Water or foreign matter in fuel
Clutch slipping Cylinder exhaust port clogged
Brake dragging
Poor Running or No Power at High Clutch slipping
Speed: Engine overheating
Firing incorrect: Transmission oil level too high
Spark plug dirty, broken, or gap malad- Transmission oil viscosity too high
justed Crankshaft bearing worn or damaged
Spark plug cap or ignition coil lead dam- KIPS ports stuck closed:
aged KIPS exhaust valves stuck closed (valve
Spark plug cap shorted or not in good con- seizure, or carbon accumulation)
tact KIPS exhaust valves assembled incorrectly
Spark plug incorrect heat value KIPS ports clogged (carbon accumulation)
CDI unit trouble Exhaust valve operating rod seizure
Crankshaft sensor broken or maladjusted Rod (for KIPS) seized in cylinder
Ignition coil trouble Knocking:
Flywheel magneto damaged Carbon built up in combustion chamber
Ignition coil lead or CDI unit lead not in good Fuel poor quality or incorrect
contact Spark plug incorrect heat value
Fuel/air mixture incorrect: CDI unit trouble
Main jet clogged or wrong size Ignition timing maladjusted
Jet needle or needle jet worn
Jet needle clip in wrong position Overheating:
Fuel level too high or too low Firing incorrect:
Slow jet or air passage clogged Spark plug dirty, broken, or maladjusted
Air cleaner clogged, poorly sealed, or miss- Spark plug incorrect
ing CDI unit trouble
Choke plunger stuck open Ignition timing maladjusted
Crankshaft oil seal deteriorated or dam- Fuel/air mixture incorrect:
aged Main jet clogged or wrong size
Fuel to carburetor insufficient Fuel level in carburetor float bowl too low
Water or foreign matter in fuel Carburetor holder loose
Fuel tank air vent obstructed Air cleaner poorly sealed, or missing
Carburetor holder loose Air cleaner duct poorly sealed
Air cleaner duct loose Air cleaner clogged
Fuel tap clogged Compression high:
Fuel line clogged Carbon built up in combustion chamber
Compression low: Engine load faulty:
Spark plug loose Brake dragging
Cylinder head not sufficiently tightened Clutch slipping
down Transmission oil level too high
Cylinder, piston worn Transmission oil viscosity too high
Piston ring bad (worn, weak, broken, or Drive train trouble
sticking) Lubrication inadequate:
Piston ring/groove clearance excessive Transmission oil level too low
Cylinder head gasket damaged Transmission oil poor quality or incorrect
Cylinder head warped Coolant incorrect:
Cylinder base gasket damaged Coolant level too low
Reed valve damaged Coolant deteriorated
Cylinder nut loose Cooling system component incorrect:
Engine rpm will not rise properly: Radiator clogged
Choke plunger stuck open Radiator cap trouble
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
16-14 APPENDIX
Troubleshooting Guide
Water pump not rotating CDI unit trouble
Water pump impeller damaged Carbon built up in combustion chamber
Clutch Operation Faulty: Fuel poor quality or incorrect
Clutch slipping: Spark plug incorrect
No clutch lever play Overheating
Clutch cable maladjusted Piston slap:
Clutch inner cable catching Cylinder/piston clearance excessive
Friction plate worn or warped Cylinder, piston worn
Steel plate worn or warped Connecting rod bent
Clutch spring broken or weak Piston pin, piston pin hole worn
Clutch release mechanism trouble Other noise:
Clutch hub or housing unevenly worn Connecting rod small end clearance exces-
Clutch not disengaging properly: sive
Clutch lever play excessive Connecting rod big end clearance exces-
Clutch plate warped or rough sive
Clutch spring compression uneven Piston ring worn, broken or stuck
Transmission oil deteriorated Piston seizure or damage
Transmission viscosity too high Cylinder head gasket leaking
Transmission oil level too high Expansion chamber leaking at cylinder
Clutch housing frozen on drive shaft head connection
Clutch housing seized Crankshaft runout excessive
Clutch release mechanism trouble Engine mounts loose
Clutch hub nut loose Crankshaft bearing worn
Friction plates installed incorrectly Primary gear worn or chipped
Clutch hub spline damaged Magneto flywheel loose
Gear Shifting Faulty:
Doesnt into gear; shift pedal doesnt Abnormal Drive Train Noise
return: Clutch noise:
Clutch not disengaging Clutch housing/friction plate clearance ex-
Shift fork bent worn, or seized cessive
Gear stuck on the shaft Clutch housing gear/primary gear backlash
Gear positioning lever binding excessive
Shift return spring weak or broken Metal chip jammed in clutch housing gear
Shift return spring pin loose teeth
Shift mechanism arm spring broken Transmission noise:
Shift mechanism arm broken Crankcase bearing worn or damaged
Gear seized Transmission gear worn or chipped
Gear positioning lever operation trouble Metal chip jammed in gear teeth
Shift drum broken Transmission oil insufficient or too thin
Jumps out of gear: Kick ratchet gear not properly disengaging
Shift fork ear worn, bent from kick gear
Gear groove worn Kick shaft idle gear worn or chipped
Gear dogs and/or dog holes worn Drive chain noise:
Shift drum groove worn Drive chain maladjusted
Gear positioning lever spring weak or bro- Drive chain worn
ken Rear and/or engine sprocket(s) worn
Shift fork guide pin worn Drive chain lubrication insufficient
Drive shaft, output shaft, and/or gear Rear wheel misaligned
splines worn
Overshifts: Abnormal Frame Noise:
Gear positioning lever spring weak or bro- Front fork noise:
ken Oil insufficient or too thin
Shift mechanism arm spring broken Spring weak or broken
Rear shock absorber noise:
Abnormal Engine Noise: Shock absorber damaged
Knocking: Spring weak or broken
Ignition timing maladjusted
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
APPENDIX 16-15
Troubleshooting Guide
Disc brake noise: Front, rear axle runout excessive
Pad installed incorrectly Wheel bearing worn
Pad surface glazed Handlebar holder bolt loose
Disc warped Handlebar holder loose
Caliper trouble Steering stem head nut loose
Master cylinder damaged Handlebars pulls to one side:
Other noise Frame bent
Bracket, nut, bolt, etc. not properly Wheel misalignment
mounted or tightened Swingarm bent or twisted
Swingarm pivot shaft runout excessive
Exhaust Smoke: Steering maladjusted
Excessive white smoke: Steering stem bent
Throttle cable maladjusted Front fork bent
Crankshaft oil seal damaged Right/left front fork oil level uneven
Brownish smoke: Shock absorption unsatisfactory:
Air cleaner duct loose (Too hard)
Air cleaner clogged Front fork oil excessive
Air cleaner poorly sealed or missing Front fork oil viscosity too high
Main jet too large of fallen out Front fork bent
Choke plunger stuck open Tire air pressure too high
Fuel level too high Rear shock absorber maladjusted
(Too soft)
Handling and/or Stability Front fork oil insufficient and/or leaking
Unsatisfactory: Front fork oil viscosity too low
Handlebars hard to turn: Front fork, rear shock absorber spring weak
Cable, hose, lead routing incorrect Rear shock absorber oil or gas leaking
Steering stem nut too tight Rear shock absorber maladjusted
Steering stem bearing damaged Tire air pressure too low
Steering stem bearing lubrication inade-
quate Brake Doesnt Hold:
Steering stem bent Disc brake:
Tire air pressure too low Air in the brake line
Handlebars shakes or excessively Pad, disc worn
vibrates: Brake fluid leak
Tire worn Disc warped
Swingarm sleeve or needle bearing dam- Contaminated pads
aged Brake fluid deteriorated
Rim warped, or not balanced Primary or secondary cup damaged
Spokes loose Master cylinder scratched inside

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


MODEL APPLICATION
Year Model Beginning Frame No.
JKBKXFCCEA000001
2014 KX85CE
JKBKX085CCA000001
JKBKXFDCEA000001
2014 KX85DE
JKBKX085DDA000001
2014 KX100FE JKAKXTFCEA000001

:This digit in the frame number changes from one machine to another.

Part No.99924-1470-01 Printed in Japan

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

You might also like